Home

8.2 Actions

1. or in List mode Borpocos C mneatrean oTneTOM 310 7 gangin Bperta ma TECT 99 rori 40 x CONOCTaBbTe CTPAHbI H HX CTONMUDI Coeaseetle nape NDADNIDHO NMEDETACKHBAR NGACH ACTH PacnonowHTe CTpaHbl B NOpPAAKE Y biBaHHaA NNOWANH OTBETbTE HA BOE GAPO ANA NOABER HODI This Object object supports these types of the questions used in CourseLab e single choice e multiple select e ordered items e numeric fill in blank e text fill in blank e matching pairs LIMITATION This Object does not support Images and other media objects only text parameters from QTI file are used Object parameters Ynpasnenne Bun WetToyHMk BoNpocaB Pan TI Palin c Bonpocamn C Courses PG 3 images ati_utf8 http okas Bonpocos CnwcKOM BECh TECT Bei6mpate Bonpoct ana nokasa cnyya Ho F On the Questions tab define source of questions QTI file or URL If local file is selected it will be automatically copied into Module s images folder In case you select URL of the file file will not be copied Select questions display mode sequentially by question or full list in this case answer is submitted for all questions simultaneously IMPORTANT Be aware that loading file from external URL may be the subject of browser security settings cross domain security Select questions randomly checkbox allows random selection of questions from all questions
2. On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin BACK BEPTHKabHbI YOpPaBAeMbIl CoBbIT4A CO SByKOM JEYK ANA HABEAEHHA JBYK ANA HAKATA On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las tab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next tab if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Select
3. order color HFFFFFF Fill brightness Lightest Border width J px Gradient angle 0 Comer radius Inner margin Shadow strength On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin Guided Image Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las tab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object c
4. Select graphics file format which will be used for export and select location on the local disk Image format Select tile format for images Save course outline as images PNG Fo WEY BMF a Pama H IPG a Pa wE TIFF k Paa 0 GIF Taa Location C Courses 27_T5 Press Next button While exporting CourseLab will open each Slide and create screenshot Depending on Course complexity this process may take significant time to complete Course outline is successfully saved to selected location qeyasino When process is finished all graphic files will be placed into selected location 5 Objects Object is the basic element of CourseLab the building brick of the Learning Module You may construct the Learning Module of any complexity by employing various Objects and building relationships among them When you insert the Object of any shape into the Frame it is placed into the Rectangular Placeholder You can change size and orientation of this Rectangular Placeholder There are 3 types of Objects allocation within the Rectangular Placeholder e Object that can automatically adjust it s size to the size of Rectangular Placeholder For example pictures and AutoShapes are always resizing it s height and width to fit the Rectangular Placeholder e Object that can resize by itself autofit to contents depending for example on the amount of the text e fixed size Obj
5. 2 px Arial 12 px Normal Normal Use sound effects Click sound Standard 1 Ww Sound file ee l On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 16 Creating customized copies of Objects Starting from CourseLab version 2 5 you can add to CourseLab Objects Library customized copies of standard objects DISCLAIMER You cannot edit or change CourseLab standard Objects in any way WebSoft Ltd shall not be liable for correct work of modified copies of Objects and no support will be provided for these modified Objects For example lets make the copy of Single Choice Question Object 1 Insert basic Single Choice Question Object on any Slide 2 Customize the Object s parameters i e view color schemes standard messages and warnings feedback and scoring etc according to your design requirements 3 Make sure that Object is displayed correctly when previewing Slide Credited question Question text Select one correct variant Variant text SUBMIT ANSWER Attempts 1 4 Keeping this Object selected click Customize link at the bottom of Objects Panel Navigation Popups Questions Rapid Developm Tests Textboxes Title Slide eS Customize ie 911x400 5 Dialog window with Objects Library str
6. Fill color main accccce Fill color gradient Gradient angle degrees Selected element tab and description Border color Border color normal Background color zd For each element you can define Tab text short text for element Description text Rich Text field for full descrioption of the element Vertical scrolling will be added automatically and sound file which will be played on tab selection You can add sound file for each Tab Display this tab selected from the start makes current tab default tab If this checkbox is not checked at one of the tabs then None selected text will be displayed in description area at object display If checkbox is checked at more than one tab first checked tab becomes default others will be ignored Select one of the predefined color schemes or define custom colors for tab description blocks gradient angle for background and common display parameters corner arc sizes and spacings Other params include e tab height in percent e corner radius in pixels or relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e border width in pixels e intertab spacing Tab block top tabs Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on a
7. You can use transition effects for this Object Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text Refreshed After text is refreshed on Text Added After text is added Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 14 Test 5 3 14 1 Test Test object presents the set of questions of different types Test object supports these types of the questions used in CourseLab e single choice e multiple select e ordered items e numeric fill in blank e text fill in blank e matching pairs LIMITATION No more than one Test on the Slide is recommended Object parameters Messages Texts Buttons Spots Questions Limitations and scoring Feedback Display Questions f Question type Question choice Meow is the cry of select Which states are in Noth America Cancel
8. Size and rotate Width 3 Height Rotation Scale Width 100 Lock aspect ratio Original size Width 500 Height 326 File courvoisier jpg Things to consider e By enlarging the picture you are not increasing the amount of information stored in the image file therefore the quality will definitely suffer e The browser s formatting capability that is used for minimizing pictures is far from perfect if compared to graphic editing tools Besides that remember that any formatting changes you apply to Slide s picture will not affect the size of the loaded image file Therefore we do not recommend making significant changes to the format of the picture when editing a Slide Optimizing Pictures After the picture is inserted and its size is changed to fit Slide layout it is recommended to optimize file size of picture Use Tools gt Compress Images menu to optimize Module image files ab Test Module Module Window Help Screen Capture Recalc Display Times Add Moduleto Templates Compress Images Options All scaled pictures in Module will be automatically resized to fit user defined width and height exactly with maximal possible picture quality and re saved Besides pictures in BMP WMF EMF formats will be converted and re saved in PNG format to minimize file sizes 5 2 4 Clip Art Pane For inserting frequently used pictures it is very convenient to use Clip Art Pa
9. 1 Use Questions tab to add any number of questions to the list of the questions by pressing button The opened edit screen practically duplicates the object Question edit window of the corresponding type the only difference is that some common test parameters are missing Please see the question object descriptions for more details By default all question in the list are displayed to yser but you can also define random selection from list of question to be displayed WARNING Be aware that you will need to calculate maximal score for the test manually to use it in maximal score for objective Also note that if you plan to use this module within an LMS limits on amount of stored data may apply depending on e learning standard used and LMS properties Every test question stores its data and length of data depends on complexity of question therefore it is recommended not to exceed 20 40 questions in test The only standard that allows large amount of data to be stored is SCORM 2004 Messages Texts Buttons Spots Questions Limitations and scoing Feedback Display Scored test Enable time limitation for test Limit test duration Test time limit min Sec L Allow recuring approaches _ Display question images Cancel You can set the test as not credited if needed for example when the test is a part of the learning process or an additional exercise rather than knowledge testing by removing
10. Strict Navigation mode You can modify header of the Settings tab and insert description texts into the Rich Text fields Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back settings Tab Display main objective status Main obiective header Display state of other module objectives Other objectives header Module objectives Use default status icon set a ia R Compl completed fs A Success unknown OOOO E SUCCESS passed aaa success Failed cee wee J On the Objectives tab you can select which Module parameters will be displayed settings Tab Objectives column header Score column header Completion status tooltip Success status tooltip On the Texts tab you can define messages and tooltips that will be presented to learner settings Tab Display Parameters Objectives Texts 30 Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using method
11. objectivelD Returns objective identifier SOBJ_ID objectivelD rawScore Returns raw objective score OBJ_ID rawScore scaledScore Returns scaled objective score if can be calculated SOBJ_ID scaledScore maxScore Returns maximal objective score if defined SOBJ_ID maxScore 5 3 14 4 Results by Objectives Results by Objectives object allows to display current score in several objectives simultaneously Example of Object appearance Scale 1 100 Scale 2 ia 10 Scale 3 100 Object parameters Results By Objectives 009900 HFOFOFO Scale 1 009900 HFOFOFO Scale Scale 2 AOO0G0cO HFOFOFO Scale 3 Scale 3 HP Soeo HFOFOFO Nomalize to 100 On the Scales tab you can select objectives list which score will be displayed and parameters for each objective Use Normalize to 100 checkbox to display percent values display only that it has no impact to real scores Results By Objectives Background color Font Font size Font weight Font color Scale spacing On the Display tab you can edit the color and font parameters Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result REFRESH TEXT Refreshes current score values 5 3 14 5 Detailed Results Detailed Results is used for dislaying detailed results on Question objects LIMITATION Object CANNOT display results on QTI Test objects Example of Object ap
12. Multiple Group Matching Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Credit question Scoring type Weight of question attempt Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed O regressive Question objectives d Eg Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Cancel Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and so forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type There are 3 options for this question type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list Sum of variant weights sum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Max of variant weights maximal weight of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question w
13. Pyramid Chart Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 2 4 Histogram Histogram is representing distribution of data Each column of the histogram is proportional to quantity it represents Example of object appearance Atlantis 31 Discovery has flown 37 flights completed 5 247 A orbits and has spent 32 days in orbit Discovery is the orbiter fleet leader having flown more flights than any other orbiter in the fleet including four in 1985 alone Discovery flew all three return to flight gad lang te aaa arty ate ie missions after the Challenger and Columbia s disasters STS 26 in 1968 STS 114 in 2005 and S718 121 in 2006 Discovery will fly the last space shuttle misson STS 133 set for launch to September 2010 81S 41 D First flight S7 51 D Carried first sitting United States Member of Congress into space Senator Jake Garn R UT TS 26 Return to space after Challenger Object parameters Histogram Chart Orange Turquoise Challenger Lightblue Columbia Red Discovery Violet Endevour Intercolumn spacing 4 Hstoga drecton Values pla
14. e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Define if this button should accept Navigation Events Actions on Button click can be defined in Actions dialog However if the Object that you want to manage has its own OPEN and CLOSE methods then you can select this Object as target Universal Button Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button 5 3 10 2 Navigation Menu Navigation Menu enables tracing of the current Slide name and an instant transition to another Slide upon selecting its name if there are no restrictions for such transition by other conditions In case there exists Alternative path in the Modu
15. It will be played when user selects current element Preview description in editor checkbox allows to preview diagram with one of the description blocks displayed in edit mode if this checkmark is set on more than one sector only first description will be displayed Pyramid Chart Color scheme Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size 1 Description inner margin Desay dessin on Display pointer line to element Use transitions on description On the Description tab you can switch displaying of description blocks on and off and define its display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin e event to start display mouse click or mouse over e display pointer line to element enables display of connecting line between sector and description block e use transitions on description enables using transitions on displaying description block Pyramid Chart Color scheme Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width aradient angle Comer arc size 0 1 Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its
16. LIMITATION During insertion of the Video clip object the content for this object is unknown to the CourseLab editor therefore Video clip placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead Object parameters EOE Parameters Video source File F WindowsMedia Sample wmv Movie autostart Windowless mode WMP IE FF NS7 _ Invisible mode Cancel Specify Video source There are two options 1 Local file file will be automatically copied into the Images folder of learning Module 2 URL full URL of movie Be aware that URL option refers to external content therefore this Video clip becomes the subject for browser security settings cross domain security Player selection option allows you to define desired player software explicitly Note that depending on this option and selected video source object placeholder may change the appearance For example this is Windows Media Player placeholder on the picture ie Windows Media Player I F images WindoveMediaSample wmy JOO Display of the player controls can be further adjusted In case Movie Autostart check box is selected Video clip is launched as soon as it is loaded otherwise user should manually select Play button using video controls or object methods Windowless mode enables to launch Windows Media Player as inline element i e in this case it can be overlapped by other objects otherwise it will be laun
17. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled 5 3 10 12 Slide Name Slide Name object enables to automatically display the current Slide name defined in the Editor LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance W Second Slide Test Course Second Slide Background color Font Font color Font size Font weight Font style Text align You can modify background color and font settings for the Slide Name with respect to the overall design of the learning Module LIMITATION The Slide Name will be displayed completely only while playing the actual Course Name substitute will be displayed in the editing mode instead Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _1D below means current object ID Property Returns slideName Returns slide name of current Slide SOBJ_ID slideName 5 3 10 13 Window title Window title object is used to configure format of title of the module window LIMITATION If the module is viewed in the frame or IFRAME some LMS use this displaying met
18. Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled value Returns current input field value SOBJ_ID value 5 3 15 3 Text Area Text Area enables user to enter large amount of text using keyboard Moving forward inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user leaves field only Example of Object appearance This is the text area Object parameters Text Input Area H Display Sound Runtime vanable name Vanable scope Default value Text wrapping Cancel Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variable scope If necessary specify default text which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up If necessary specify text wrapping rules The default behavior for Text Area is to automatically move to a new line once the length of text line exceeds the right margin Automatic soft wrap This is rather Virtual text wrapping in fact if you enlarge Text Area text will wrap at the different position Other wrapping rules e Automatically move to a new line and insert CRLF carriage retur
19. fms G ren ren C roms oreo jaro ren roms ore Tsou srren aran eee C Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Numeric Fill In Blank Question Use custom timer colors Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color sa On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appear
20. t Descrioti First item test Second item text Third item text Inner margin Space between items Select border color for the list items with respect to the overall design Select items mark for the list Item Input text for the list items Specify value for text margin and space between items Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block Standard List Etemal call Delayed auto Standard button ton Button text Next tem Border color Background color Font sie tca pooo TC Object enables displaying the list of items either consecutively in automatic mode with user defined time delays or by accepting user input in a form of pressed button or clicked text link On external call mode means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object s method NEXT ITEM will be used The only parameter here is Display first item automatically Standard List Use transitions Transition Wipe right Duration SEC tes Ty ee In case Use Transitions check box is marked you can choose any of the standard transition effects Positive numbers greater than 0 are used to set Time of the transition in seconds LIMITATIONS Due to lack of transition support in some browsers transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer Standard List Use sound effec
21. 6 2 Controlling Display Time 6 2 1 Effects By default objects are entirely displayed on the frame However to make the learning process even more interactive specify transitions at display LIMITATION The full set of effects transitions displays correctly only in Internet Explorer browser in all other browsers the set of transitions is limited In case selected transition is not supported by particular browser CourseLab player will automatically replace such transition with the one supported by current browser Use Display tab on the Format screen to specify object entry transition The CourseLab and consequently the CourseLab player contains 24 options of built in entry transitions For each transition out of all entry or exit specify duration in seconds Format Display Sound Display Display Rest of frame oo E seconds Appear after oo B seconds Entrance Effect Wipe down Duration L seconds Exit Effect Duration Remarks e Unlike the time of entry transition execution which is included into the time of object execution the time of exit transition is not included into the time of object execution thus such transition will be carried out in overtime e Transitions as well as other common settings are applicable to the object s placeholder Therefore if placeholder s size is much bigger than size of actual object then transition execution against an empty pla
22. Balloon color Arrow Balloon text Cancel Select balloon color with respect to the overall design of the Slide Press Apply button to observe changes Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text If necessary specify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between balloon border and the text After you done with parameters settings place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area Usually Balloon should open up when the user s mouse moves over that link or active area Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define onMouseOver and onMouseOut actions enabling display of Balloon 5 3 6 5 Idea Balloon Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide In general amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small smaller than the instructions used for the similar Pop up window types of objects Balloon object is intended to open up when the user s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user s mouse moves away from the active area Therefore Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism Compared to Pop up window type of object Balloon objects can have pointer arrow some explanation on TRIGGER TEAT oe oP This is the TRIGGER TEXT for balloon Object parameters Idea B
23. Display continued question message Help Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored
24. ET t e p Meow is the cry of Cat Please refer to the Positioning Objects section of this document for more details on the specifics of object allocation 4 3 3 4 Slide Comments New Slide Delete Slide Rename Identifier Master Advance View Slide z Him Actions 4 3 3 5 Slide Transition Slide Comments is additional text block that can be attached to the Slide It can contain author s comments and remarks to the Slide or comments to the Slide that imported from PowerPoint presentation Slide Comments is not part of viewable Slide area and it is not an object therefore it cannot be displayed as usual text object Special objects are used to display comments to learner please refer to Complex Objects Navigation section To add or edit comments to the Slide right click on the Slide from the Slide Panel and select Comments option from the context menu RichText editing window will appear Edit the text Please note that PowerPoint makes comments white by default therefore imported comments may be invisible white on white By default it is assumed that Transition to the next Slide will be performed by using Next Slide Button or other user activated navigations Apparently this is the most common situation when the user is in control of the timing for observing the Slide Cut Copy But there are instances when timing must be set to Transition Paste to the next Slide regardle
25. Me NT 4 0 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 2008 e MacOS X e iOS e Linux e Browser e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher 8 0 and higher recommended e Mozilla FireFox 3 0 or higher 4 0 and higher recommended e Google Chrome 1 0 or higher 7 0 and higher recommended e Apple Safari 4 0 or higher 5 1 and higher recommended e Opera 11 0 or higher 12 0 and higher recommended e JavaScript enabled e XML support enabled Some web technologies may not work For example Adobe Flash is not supported in some mobile devices Local launching of Course is available for these browsers only User must allow launching active content from local disks in browser settings 1 3 Compliance to the Standards eLearning Courses created using CourseLab depending on the publishing method support the following international learning industry standards e AICC http www aicc org e SCORM 1 2 http www adinet org e SCORM 1 3 SCORM 2004 http www adinet org CourseLab certified by ADL for compliance to the SCORM 2004 SCORM 2004 Content Package 1 4 CourseLab and LMS Learning Management System LMS is a complex software platform that enables automation of the management and delivery of distributed learning content Learning Management System tracks completion of the e learning Courses and provides compiles reports upon completion of the course Modern Learning Management Systems are based on the internat
26. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Multiple Select Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations coing Feedback Display Credit question ae Weight of question attempt v Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed O regressive Question objectives d Eg Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and so forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Sum of variant weights sum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Max of variant weights maximal weight of all selected variant weights will be
27. The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ID disabled value Returns current input field value SOBJ_ID value 5 3 15 2 Hidden Text Field Hidden Text Field enables user to input text or numbers using keyboard At display input text is replaced with bullets Moving forward inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user leaves field only Example of Object appearance Object parameters Hidden Input Field Display Sound Runtime vanable name password v Vanable scope Default value Maximal value length Cancel Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variabl
28. commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions 0B _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ID queue 5 3 12 Lists 5 3 12 1 Bulleted List Bulleted List object is used for creating sequentially appearing lis
29. creation fully functional standalone separate from CourseLab version of the Learning Course intended for distribution on CD in the Learning Management System and so on During publishing only those elements which are required for displaying the Course are copied into the separate folder from the folder containing the working version of the Course also some other elements added which are not used for editing but require for Course display The working version of the Course during publishing remains unchanged Depending on the prospective usage there are different choices of Course publishing e for Launching from the CD e for distribution in the LMS which supports AICC standard e for distribution in the LMS which supports SCORM 1 2 standard e for distribution in the LMS which supports SCORM 2004 standard e for further work in CourseLab TeamWork Sequence of the publishing steps as follows e Module Runtime Settings e Course Runtime Settings e Course Publication Wizard 4 6 1 Module Runtime Settings Prior to publishing it is necessary to specify runtime settings for each Module in the Course Select Module gt Runtime Settings sub menu Module Properties dialog window opens up Module Properties General Objectives Rules Checks Runtime Module identification in LMS Identifier Description Test Module 1 Cancel Select General tab and fill in Identifier and Description
30. display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Pyramid Chart Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 2 3 Rings chart Rings chart is representing hierarchical data Each level can contain more than one sector It is similar to Pyramid chart represents the same type of hierarchy Example of object appearance This is description text for Level 2 part 1 Object parameters Rings Chart Define the list of pyramid levels and level elements sectors on the Elements tab For each level you can assign color scheme for each block in level text of element description text and its parameters Please note that if there are no sector elements defined in level then it will not displayed at all Top level can have only one element if more than one element is defined then only first will be displayed Use button to open lev
31. e Learn as you practice Allow audience to interact with the system as it significantly improves the process of memorizing the learning material eLearning is interactive by its nature thus use this potential to the full extent Where appropriate enable onscreen actions to demonstrate different results by manipulating with parameters Use quizzes 4 2 New Course Wizard To create a new course select File gt New gt Course File Edit View Insert Format Tools Module Window Help _ Course Ctrl Shift n Module Ctri N Folder Ctrl S Save All Ctrl Shift 5 Course Runtime Settings Publish Course Recent Courses Exit The New Course Wizard appears To continue click Next New Course P Welcome to the New Course Wizard With help of this w I Wizard you can to create a new learning course gt In CourseLab a course contains one or more learning modules The module is a sequence of slides slides contains learning materials and tests CourseLab is a tool in which your can create and edit courses modules slides You can import PowerPoint presentations or use advanced Screen Capture feature to create software scenarios CourseLab also can package courses to use in Learning Management Systems environments or prepare courses to distribute on CD qejyasinoy To continue dick Next Version 2 4 Provide the name of the course the name of the course folder and location where course folder s
32. oBJ _ID below means current object ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue Returns Returns current question mode tokens normal review select Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current question value spot values divided by for example 0 1 1 0 O corresponds to empty spot 1 to checked spot Note that the order of spots is always as it was defined in object no matter shuffled or not attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts left attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 4 Ordered items Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Ordered Items types of questions require from the user to specify the right order of presented items LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance Question amp Scored How to make coffee espresso Place variants in correct order Enjoy the taste offresh espresso Grind coffee beans Turn espresso machine on Place ground coffee in espresso machine Attempts 3 Question time limit i 15 sec Object parameters Ordering Question Button Texts Sou
33. tokens normal review range Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current question item order spot numbers starting from 0 divided by for example 3 1 0 2 0 1 2 3 in this case corresponds to correct order Returns current number of attempts left Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 5 Numerical fill in blank Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ID questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Numerical fill in Blank Questions require from the user to enter the correct number into the answer field using keyboard LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance Question is Scored How many stars are on the flag of USA Enter numeric value Hint how many states you know sol Attempts 1 Question time limit ME E Object parameters Numeric Fill In Blank Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Variants t i Max size 10 To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Specify the approximate len
34. 1 if mute sound is set to true O otherwise Returns current sound volume range 0 100 Returns current media name if exists empty string otherwise Returns full media duration in seconds Returns current position in media in seconds currentState Returns current object state tokens undefined stopped paused playing forward backward buffering waiting ended preparing ready reconnect url Returns current media URL if available isOnline WMP only Returns 1 if player object has access to the network O otherwise 5 3 9 4 Java Java Applet object is used for inserting Java Applets into the learning Course Syntax SOBJ_ID autoStart SOBJ_ID mute SOBJ_ID volume SOBJ_ID currentMedia SOBJ_ D duration SOBJ_ D currentPosition SOBJ_ D currentState SOBJ_ D url SOBJ_ D isOnline IMPORTANT Java Virtual Machine should be installed on the computer for running Java Applets free download at http www sun com To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature which checks whether or not Java has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Module menu Runtime Settings Checks Java applet cannot be played in edit mode only placeholder of the applet is visible Object parameters Java applet Parameters Java JAR archive D Courses starwars jar B sa 1 EEE Additional files _ FF Ep File Horizo
35. 12 P __ok_ Cancel J ay Hep Single Choice Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Change Selection User changes selected item on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped Af
36. 5 3 10 17 Simple Progress Bar Simple Progress Bar is a special object which indicates amount of the visited Slides relative to the overall amount of the Slides In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Object parameters Simple Progress Bar Fr TY Parameters Icon spacing pa Background color e Border width px Border color id Inner margin px Cancel By default the standard Slide s icons are used If you wish to use different icons uncheck the marker Fields for inserting pictures become available Create 3 images using any graphical editor e The first image will be displayed indicating already visited Slide e The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide e The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed You can also modify appearance parameters of the Progress Bar 5 3 10 18 Extended Progress Bar Extended Progress Bar is a special object which indicates amount of the visited Slides relative to the overall amount of the Slides Unlike Simple Progress Bar Extended Progress Bar displays the name of the current Slide it also enables exploring the names of other Slides and enables transition to them In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternati
37. Amazement and Return upon completion Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method ACTION RETURN TO IDLE TELEPORT EE METHOD a oeu CG a Peiemion JO Retum to idle state In the above example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching Action However any other Events or delayed Actions can be employed for the same purpose Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Object e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE M
38. Button j Parameters i sound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 we Click sound Standard 1 WV Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 10 16 Replay Slide Button Replay Slide Button object is a special object which enables current Slide reloading for example to repeat animation used in the Slide LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Object parameters Replay Slide Button Use default button set Enabled button tooltip Replay current slide Disabled button tooltip Access is not allowed Strict Navigation mode Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image
39. ID or Item name If both parameters will present then Item ID will be used and Item name will be ignored DISPLAY ITEM Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB3_ D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise OBJ_ID disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise OBI_ID open 5 3 10 23 Simple Search Simple Search object enables search functionality within the current Module Simple Search is displayed as search field and button LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Use default border color Header text Found text Not found text Window size hor Window position hor Font Highlighting In the opened dialog you can select the border color for the results window with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Also you can modify title text and style You can modify size and location of popup window with respect to the design of the learning Module however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes Simple Search Field Use default button set Enabled button tooltip Disabled button tooltip Search disabled Close
40. MSGBOX NAVIGATION PRINT RETURN TT t x J cane For example Question types of Objects can generate Events such as on Success on Failure on Attempts Limit and other Events specific to the test questions However when it comes to managing these Events they are treated the same as any other Event Custom Objects Events are described in the corresponding sections under the Object These Events are described in Help documents of corresponding Objects 8 1 4 Using Keyboard events You can use keyboard events i e pressing the keys to launch action sequences For every slide you can define onkeydown events as many as you wish depending on key combinations number needed Note that keyboard events can be defined on the Slide and Frame only i e specific objects cannot have it s own onkeydown events To define such event open action editor using Slide context menu and right click on free white space in Events pane B Ala gt t amp Event Object Action beforedisplay CALL atterdisplay DISPLAY L Lag EXTERNAL URL z FOR GOTO IF COMPLETION STATUS IF SCORE IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP MSGBOA NAVIGATION PRINT New Keyboard event window appears Press the key or key combination it will be recorded in the Key field Keyboard Event Ctrl Shift F Create as many onkeydow
41. Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Cholerics Melancholics Phlegmatics Sanguines Object parameters Animated Agent different psycho types Parameters Character Melancholic female Display mode You can specify an Agent s appearance and display parameters similar to Flash movie display settings in fact an Agent is a Flash movie In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture a situation when we have both a question and an Agent character presented in a Slide The Agent s task is to applaud when the provided answer to the question is correct Test Course First Slide Meow is the cry of Cat Cow Here is the sequence of the ne
42. Numeric Fill In Blank Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scormg Feedback Display Number of attempts Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recuring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts Number of Attempts field is always available for input there is no automatic attempts calculation rule There you can specify the number of answer attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Numeric Fill In Blank Question Button Texts Sound Question Limita
43. Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Item Moved User moves any item on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns Returns current question mode
44. Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Object parameters Shadow Text Box Main box Shadow Effects Quick brown fax jumps over lazy dog Quick brown fo r Inner margin Background color Border style Border color Border width pixels Box opacity z To input text into the text box press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in If desired modify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the box and text You can change text box fill color You can modify style color and width for the text box border 3ametTpbTe YTO rpaHULia GOKCa TaKKE NOAYMHAETCA STOMY NapamerTpy Finally you can modify opacity of the main box Please be advised that any changes applied to the opacity affects the border of the text box as well In case text box Shading is On it is not recommended to use opacity less than 100 Shadow Text Box i Effects Display box shadow Shadow shit hor 5 vert picels Shadow intensity pa Shadow copies main box Use Shadow tab to specify display settings for shading effect The key control is Display Box Shadow check box In case this check box is not marked then all other settings are disabled for editing In case text box Shading is On you can specify vertic
45. Scored Test mark on the Limitations and scoring tab You can permit or restrict timing in questions Use Enable time limitation for test check box if timing is defined In addition you can specify time limit for the whole test use Limit test duration check box and corresponding field You can permit the option of skipping the question by marking corresponding check box however question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later Besides that you can allow the second run for the test If this option is unchecked the user will be prompted with message stating that test had already been taken and only test results can be viewed In case this option is marked the student will be prompted with the same as above warning message but with the two options available to choose from one is to take test again and second is to see test results If test is taken again all previous test results are discarded Also you can permit or restrict display of pictures related to the questions for the entire Test IMPORTANT You can not set up Objective for storing results of the entire test instead when editing each question specify parameters settings for required Objective s Such approach allows maximum flexibility when evaluating test results Messages Texts Buttons Questions Limitations and scoring Feedback Display ight answer Display feedback messages conc anne T No more att
46. actions taken by the user e Different options for assessing and evaluating gathered knowledge tests exercises Incorporation of eLearning Course into the Learning Management System and intercommunication between them enables the most efficient management of the overall learning process Within Learning Management System the eLearning Course is considered as an independent learning unit which can be assigned for assessing the level of learning Upon completion of eLearning Course various reports could be generated by the Learning Management System From the education methodology perspective eLearning Course corresponds to any conventional Learning Course assuming that eLearning Course encloses all the necessary self educational learning material and tests for controlling and evaluating apprehension of the learning material 3 1 Module Learning Module is a fundamental building block of the Course hierarchy representing the set of author structured Slides During the learning process the learner is led from one Slide to another sequentially which is default behavior If desired author of the learning Module can define different order of the Slides appearance for example depending on the result of the test Learning Module can be used for educational purposes in this case consists of learning material only besides that Learning Module can be employed for assessing of the learned lessons can contain tests and exercises It is a co
47. alternative action sequence i e when condition is not met IF_SUCCESS_STATUS objectiveid Objective select Status Parameters Objective String Identifier of the objective Success Status of which must be verified Status Token Can have one of the following values Value Description Unknown Success Status is unknown Failed Success Status of selected objective has value Failed Succeeded Success Status of selected objective has value Passed Remarks Set of actions dependant to IF SUCCESS STATUS action must be located down below to the right relatively to IF SUCCESS STATUS action 8 2 12 SET COMPLETION STATUS SET COMPLETION STATUS action changes Completion Status for the specified objective SET COMPLETION STATUS objectiveid Objective select Status Parameters Objective String The identifier of the objective Completion State of which will be changed Status Token Represents the value of the selected objective s Completion Status to be assigned Value Description Unknown No information on objective s completion status Not Attempted Completion of the objective is not started yet Incomplete Completion of the objective is started but it is not finished yet Complete Completion of the objective is finished 8 2 13 SOUND SOUND action either initiates or stops playback of the audio file SOUND objectid Object edit File select Action Parameters Object String The identifier of the object with associa
48. always only one objective marked as Module Objective score and statuses of this objective will be sent to LMS as whole module score and statuses Initial statuses are set by default to Completion status to Incomplete Success status to Unknown It means that once learner has enered the module its completion status immediately becomes Incomplete This is most common behaviour Minimal and maximal scores are set by default to O an 100 correspondingly Minimal score is the initial score value in most cases 0 Maximal score must be changed to sum of all scores that can be achieved bu learner i e maximal possible score for this objective This value is used by LMS and result displaying objects to calculate percent values Objective Identifier Description This is automatically created module ob Initial State Completion SUCCESS Score Maximal Minimal Cancel Actions to change objectives Actions with scores and statuses include e SET SCORE Changes score for specified objective e SET COMPLETION STATUS Changes objective s completion status e SET SUCCESS STATUS Changes objective s success status e IF SUCCESS STATUS Branches actions depending on success status e IF COMPLETION STATUS Branches actions depending on completion status e IF SCORE Branches actions depending on score 9 2 Rules The Rule presents the set of conditions If conditions are satisfied the status of indicated objec
49. and ready on Timeout At the moment of time expiration for current question if defined on Test Timeout At the moment of time expiration for the whole test if defined on Test End After all questions are answered or test timeout 5 3 14 3 Current Results Current Results object allows to display current score in one objective usually for main module objective Example of Object appearance Curent score OQ Maximal score 100 Object parameters Current Results Display current score Explanation Display maximal score Explanation Normalize to 100 On the Parameters tab you can select objective which score will be displayed and parameters that will be displayed You can edit descriptions for current and maximal scores Use Normalize to 100 checkbox to display percent values display only that it has no impact to real scores Current Results Border color Cell background color Score font Score font size Score font weight Score font color On the Display tab you can edit the color and font parameters Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result REFRESH TEXT Refreshes current score values Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax
50. and scaling You can import comments to Slides if necessary and position it on the Slide the same way as the presentation main body grey area represents comments Press the Next button to proceed Import from PowerPoint Content area Provide size and position of the content rect w Import comments Pers HeALULHHE La A On the next wizard page you can select the Slides to be imported Hold down the Ctrl key to select Slides Import from PowerPoint Source slides Select slides 1 Nokia Secure Mobile Connectivity 2 Two Mega Trends Mobility amp the I 3 How Mobile Are Your Workers 5 oe NOKIA 6 Work Goes Mobile in Soca CONNECTING PEOPLE 10 Introducing Nokia Access Mobilizer ii Nokia Access Mobilizer 12 Really Any Browser Enabled Sm 13 Email Experience Like the Desktop 14 Proof Email on a Nokia Phone 15 More Proof Email on Another No Press the Next button and start processing Import from PowerPoint Import from PowerPoint Venty import settings To start import dick Next If you want to review or change import settings dick Back To exit from Wizard now dick Cancel Depending on the size of presentation it can take up to several minutes to import presentation In general imported Slides reproduce the corresponding PowerPoint Slides You can further modify these Slides if desired Import from PowerPoint Presentation successfully i
51. another attempt True False Question Button Texts sound Question limitations Scoring Feedback Display _ Display corect answer Prev Corect answer F incorect answer Incomect Timeout Time is out TE L Offset horizontal px Offset vertical px _ Hide feedback me Backgroum Border Button cor gess pe 1D rer een C rene C r JC poo acon erres C ares C Tne arrene eee C r TC Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner horizontal and vertical offsets True False Question Button skin Whole variant as spot Use custom spots Unchecked sp
52. bar before transition to the Slide but then all the images of the Slide will be displayed much faster e Allow to view Slides in sequential order only this feature disables transition on the Slide that is unvisited yet and is not the next to last visited Slide in line Transition to any visited Slide is not restricted e Scale module score to 100 legacy feature Modern eLearning standards include special parameters for raw and scaled score To set Objectives and Rules please read Objectives chapter 4 6 2 Course Runtime Settings Prior to publishing it is necessary to specify execution parameters for the Course Select File gt Course Runtime Settings sub menu Course Execution Parameters dialog window opens up Course Properties i General Course identification in LMS Identifier TEST_001 Description Test Course created with CourseLab Cancel On General tab fill in Identifier and Description fields under Course identification in LMS section These parameters will be saved in metadata files which will be used to import course structure in LMS Identifier is a short Course id which will be used as Course reference code in the Learning Management System LIMITATION Please use Latin characters and numbers for Course and Module code Avoid using spaces and other special symbols Description brief informal description of the Course which will b
53. can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Things to consider when working with Actions e Actions Talk Walk left right cannot automatically return to the idle mode The Agent will continue talking and walking until ordered to terminate the Action e Actions such as Yawn Head nod in agreement Head shake in disagreement so called simple Actions marked with will always return to the idle state upon completion Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash
54. change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open O otherwise SOBJ_ID open 5 3 10 6 Calculator Tab Calculator tab enables displaying the Calculator which can be used for calculations inside the Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance MS First Slide Test Course Calculator Qu Sele Backspace CE HOn 45 6 HHE On lt I kd pan Lt Object parameters Calculator Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab Onttousel ver tab Disabled tab OnClick Tab Border color horizontal Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip In case the default tab is used
55. deat _ X For inserting frequently used pictures it is convenient to use the Clip Art section in gt the tasks area It displays thumbnail images in a Clip Art folder on the computer Click Browse at the bottom of the Clip Art section to designate the folder which will be accessible in the Clip Art panel In the opened Browse for Folder dialog box select the folder containing pictures It is a good idea to preload this Clip Art with the pictures you plan to use in your course To add a picture to the Slide drag the thumbnail image into the working area 2 3 4 Autoshapes Autoshapes X j i AutoShapes is a group of special Objects based on vector controls arrows stars SIE nal BlockArows Curves rectangles etc Depending on the vector structure AutoShapes can be es resized to any size without losing form and quality mW To insert an Object select the desired tab in the AutoShapes section on the Task Pane and double click on the Object a a b a e a e gt Flowchart 2 3 5 Scenarios scenarios CourseLab scenarios are templates for building interactions between multiple Complex i Objects fg Task Pane in the Scenarios mode displays all Scenarios that available for creating Li Course grouped by their purpose 2 3 6 Design Templates aoe Task Pane in the Templates mode displays all Templates that available for anain creating Course Using these T
56. designed to replace the older and simpler GIF and JPG formats When saving at an 8 bit depth PNG 8 the format is comparative to GIF in general it provides about 15 better compression ratio than GIF since PNG 8 performs compression along both horizontal and vertical axes When saving to a 24 bit depth PNG 24 the format provides high quality color changeovers and a very good level of file compression PNG supports transparency and preserves the quality of the color changeovers regardless of the underlying color The only disadvantage of the PNG format is that it has limited support in older versions of Internet Browsers and limited support by some graphic editors Nevertheless since the older versions of Browsers are not supported in CourseLab Courses we encourage using this format if possible Other Formats You can use other graphical formats which are supported by Internet Browsers such as BMP WMF and others However consider the fact that some Browsers display these formats incorrectly Besides BMP files and other non compressed formats are very large in size The choice is yours if you are confident that images will be displayed correctly and network traffic permits it you may use these types of format in your Course 5 2 3 Optimizing Pictures Change the Size of Picture Once picture is inserted you may format picture within CourseLab using controls on Size tab on the Format Picture dialog window Format
57. display This is the most frequently used action DISPLAY objectid Object select Display select Effect time Duration Parameters Object String The identifier of the object which must be either displayed or hidden Display Token Hide or Show selected object Value Description Show Object will be displayed Hide Object will be hidden Effect Token Enables using of transition on this action Value Description Object Use transition defined in selected object s properties None Disable transition Any other value Selects transition type for this action Duration Number Duration of selected transition in seconds will be ignored if None selected in parameter Effect SEQUENTIALLY action enables launching of dependant actions in strict sequential order i e each next action will be launched only upon completion of the previous one unlike the usual routine where actions are launched in predefined order even the previous action is not even finished SEQUENTIALLY Parameters No parameters Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by SEQUENTIALLY action must be indented at one position from SEQUENTIALLY See also PARALLEL action if you need to launch actions concurrently 8 2 25 MSGBOX MSGBOX action enables display of the message warning window for the user with text specified MSGBOX edit Text Parameters Text String delimited with or expression of any available type Message text Remarks Parame
58. dragging using mouse the borders of the stripe lines or the stripe line itself Stripe lines with mouse cursors on it represent the time duration of the cursors movement The empty spots on the stripe lines represent time during which the cursor remains still IMPORTANT In case Display Click setting is specified in the cursor s properties you should define the pause before the next cursor move or before Frame display end time is not less than 0 7 seconds 6 3 Object Properties Object Properties are parameters of object which can be used in actions and text substitution 6 3 1 Common Object Properties Common Object Properties are properties that belongs to every CourseLab object and can be used in actions and in text substitutions OBJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax X Returns current X coordinate of top left corner of object s position on SOBJ_ID X the Frame y Returns current Y coordinate of top left corner of object s position on OBJ_ID Yy the Frame W Returns current width of the object in pixels SOBJ_ID W h Returns current height of the object in pixels SoBs_ID h startx Returns initial X coordinate of top left corner of object s position onthe Sos _iD startx Frame that was defined in Edit mode starty Returns initial Y coordinate of top left corner of object s position onthe Sosj_iD starty Frame that was defined in Edit mode startw Returns initial width of object SoB _ID
59. e IF COMPLETION STATUS conditional action executes set of subordinate actions depending on the Completion Status of the specified objective e SOUND either initiates or stops playback of the audio file e ELSE alternative branch for conditional actions CHECKHIT IF IF COMPLETION STATUS IF SCORE IF SUCCESS STATUS e METHOD enables launching execution of object s methods e NAVIGATION enables turning ON OFF capability for transition to another Slides of the Module e PARALLEL enables launching of dependant actions in parallel threads e SET SCORE Changes score for specified objective e DELAY inserted into the sequence of actions will interrupt sequence e VARIABLE defines variable and it s value for CourseLab Player e GOTO enables transition to another Slide or Frame e PRINT calls standard browser s Print dialog window e DISPLAY enables turning ON OFF object display e SEQUENTIALLY enables launching of dependant actions in strict sequential order e MSGBOX enables display of the message warning window e CHECKHIT conditional action is used for verifying the particular object that was dropped onto the selected ones e SIZE START initiates resizing of the object within a frame e SIZE STOP interrupts resizing of the selected object or all currently resized objects e TIMER is used for delayed launching of dependant actions e SET SUCCESS STATUS changes Success Status for the specified objective e FO
60. fields under Module identification in LMS section These parameters will be saved in metadata files which will be used to import course structure in LMS Identifier is a short Module id which will be used as Module reference code in the Learning Management System Please use Latin characters and numbers for Course and Module code Avoid using spaces and other special symbols Description brief informal description of the Module which will be used within Learning Management System in the Course card Module Properties Objectives Rules Checks peme Checks Microsoft Media Player Macromedia Flash Player Macromedia Shockwave Player C Apple QuickTime Player Use Checks tab to specify names of the software components that need to be checked for availability on student s computer prior to launching Module Module Properties General Objectives Rules Checks Runtime Runtime show Tite Slide at module startup preload images J allow to view slides in sequental order only Options scale module score to 100 before send it to LMS On Runtime tab you can specify some Module runtime parameters such as e Show Title Slide at Module Startup if this checkbox is unchecked Title Slide will be automatically skipped e Preload images allows preloading all images of particular Slide before display Usually this feature causes some delay with Loading images progress
61. from your CourseLab supplier in response to your deactivation request 3 Deactivate the license using the received response VIC file 4 Create deactivation confirmation C3V file and send it to your CourseLab supplier to confirm successful deactivation On the next Wizard screen select location where C2V file with deactivation request will be created Create this file and send it as attachment to your CourseLab supplier Deactivation License deactivation Actions to deactivate your license 1 Select a destination folder and generate CIV file with the deactivation request Location 2 Send the generated CV file via e mail to your CourseLab supplier 3 Deactivate CourseLab using the V2C file received from your CourseLab supplier in response to your e mail Location After you receive reply from your supplier with V2C file attached save this file on local disk proceed to the same Deactivation License Wizard screen select location of the file in corresponding field and press Next License on this computer will be deactivated and another C2V file will be created send it to your CourseLab supplier to confirm license deactivation 12 3 CourseLab registration Registration of your CourseLab is not mandatory but may help CourseLab support team to speed up your support request processing Select menu Help gt Register CourseLab Registration Wizard will open CourseLab registration Please register your CourseLab softwar
62. giant Clear Channel after it was fined far inaasearnew Object parameters Managed tab block Process E Restore object state On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state T Howard Stem Description text Controversial radio DJ Howard Stem is to rep Sound file Tab text short text that will be displayed on the Tab Description full text that will be displayed in Description Area of the Object when corresponding Tab is selected This is Rich Text field it can contain pictures tables links etc Scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Description Area size For each element you can define sound file with narration Display this tab selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Tab selected from the start and also displaying its preview in Edit mode In case no Tab is selected first Tab will be selected by default In case more than one Tab is selected first selected Tab will be active others will be ignored Managed tab block Process Custom color Brightness Color scheme selected Custom color Fill brightness Border width Tab font Custom font Font size Font style Shadow strength Select color schemes for idle and selected states one of predefined or custom You can also ligh
63. i 4 sec Object parameters Matching Pairs Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Display question block Question text Vanants Match Discovery of Am First airplane The end of Worl First man on the Match weight is used only if comesponding scoring bpe is selected Apply To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Considering specifics of matching pairs questions it is not always necessary to display the text of the question Remove corresponding checkmark in case you want the question text not to be displayed Specify variants of matching question items In the list of answers menu add as many variants of matching question items as needed using menu button In the opened sub dialog pairs editor screen press TE button of the corresponding field and insert text of base item and it s corresponding match which is in RichText format Please remember that there are size limitations for entering both the base items and matches therefore try using short texts and small fonts Inserted question items appear in in the List of items If desired you can edit entered items by pressing Edit button under the List menu Note that in matching pairs types of questions the correct matching pai
64. i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Ordering Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Seong Feedback Display Credit question Scoring type Weig
65. iea ied od eb a eat ed a Lada ba nicl sand anaes 532 BAAS ld ROSY COR SMe Ren PE Re ETC PRE Pe eT O TP Ee OT PS Pe ee 533 82 19 DELAY Sr a an ene RE SP tee PRE oP ee Pe Oe SP rR eee ee BE CS Ee DD See AA 533 8 220 VARIA BEE saphena seaerie ties iand a aR geet aA EAGAN PR LLORAS 534 oO peal las OTO RRP ROr merc eRe Berar Re Seer RRO PATE E ST TRAE rm Rr TET EE Ot O eo RNR Ere ore 535 PAPRA A DE Re AEA S A E EATE AE TE AE ATO eT ORT SATE ET ETE EA CE TEA S 535 B2 A ASPE a FE A E E E a A E E a E ee 536 82A SEQUENTIAL Y oiran a a e a a a a a Aaa 536 223 MSGBOX cona T a a a E E A A en ree 537 8 220 CHECKA ari anae a a a n E RCO Tau ak ead eo an catia Madea dSeneees 537 8227 AZE S TAR Focene A a a a a N 538 E 2O ES O a E A A E a EAEE T E E 538 E22 I TIME R aE eR EE OA SRD oR E E ETE A N TT TE E E ETN 539 A 50 SET SOCEES SS ATS E E E EN SE E A A E E E E EEA ied 539 E2 LF OR aE A E O O A A E E eat SESE 540 BIDS JAVASCRIPT aea E a teow sited A E A T AE 540 o Api e VAA D D E OEEO AEE ENEN AE TEE N EE E TN EN EEE E E ETE 540 8 2 54 USING EXPrESSIONS IN ACTIONS isinira E ASA 541 Ds SCORING oinera a a S a 544 S ECORIECHVE aaa oe a Re ee 544 IRULE oaen a a a a a a a a a a a 546 TO SCREEN CAPTURE ciu a a NN 551 10 1 WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE PRIOR TO RECORDING THE SIMULATION ccccecsceccescccseuceeesecseuseeeseeseuceeuseeseuseeuseeceuneeues 551 10 2 SCREEN CAPTURE WIZARD a A E A a A a AANEEN 551 TO CAPTURE FRAMES eas e a N a a ea nae a a Na a a N 554
66. in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Ordering Question Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color Use custom spots Up normal Up disabled Down normal Down disabled On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Ordering Question Button type Submit answer text Skip question text Button size width Border style Border width Border color Backend clr mn eG jm fie Ordering Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events
67. in a learning course Because learning courses can be hosted on the Internet it is strongly recommended that you use small graphic files in compressed graphic formats such as GIF JPG and PNG Each format has some advantages and disadvantages which should be taken under consideration Below is the brief overview of these formats GIF Graphics Interchange Format GIF is the most common format for Internet graphics as it is supported by all Browsers and majority of graphic editors GIFs use a special compression algorithm limited to 256 or less colors and simple linear compression along the horizontal axis allowing for a very small size of graphic file if there are large areas of the same color It is therefore not suitable for storing photos and images with the large grated areas the stored image will have a large file size and poor quality GIFs support transparency you can choose a single color in the image that will be rendered as invisible allowing the background to show through when the image is viewed on a Web page but you have to remember that GIF supports only 1 bit transparency each pixel for the given color so called Alpha Channel is completely removed The latest version of the GIF format supports animation created by stringing together various still images GIF animation can be used in a learning Module The CourseLab editor will not play a GIF animation only the first GIF image is displayed on the Slide in editing mode
68. in file WARNING Be aware that you will need to calculate maximal score for the test manually to use it in maximal score for objective Also note that if you plan to use this module within an LMS limits on amount of stored data may apply depending on e learning standard used and LMS properties Every test question stores its data and length of data depends on complexity of question therefore it is recommended not to exceed 20 40 questions in test The only standard that allows large amount of data to be stored is SCORM 2004 Most of test and questions parameters are defined in QTI file but you can change or override some of them TEKCTbl FHCTpYKLHH Paspewnm nosTopHbll npoxon NpenocTaenTh BbiDOp OK Omera On Parameters tab you can define Objectives for all questions of the QTI Test Unlike usual Test there is no possibility to bind Objectives to distinct questions You can permit the option of skipping the question by marking corresponding check box however question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later Besides that you can allow the second run for the test If this option is unchecked the user will be prompted with message stating that test had already been taken and only test results can be viewed In case this option is marked the student will be prompted with the same as above warning message but with the two options available to choose from one is to take test again
69. is the cry of Select correct variant Cat Cow Dog gt sheep Attempts 3 Question time limit i 3 sc Object parameters single Choice Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Question text Variants Corect vanant yes no no no Shuffle variants on display Variant weight is used only if comesponding scoring hype is selected To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Use button to specify possible answers as many as needed In the opened sub dialog screen press TE button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer Select checkbox for correct answer LIMITATION No more than one answer should be marked as the correct otherwise result will be incorrect Select Shuffle variants on display check box in case you want answers to be displayed in random order Otherwise answers will be displayed in order they were inserted Use Up and Down arrows to change order Single Choice Question Button Texts Sound Question Scoing Feedback Display Set number of attempts automatically Limit time for the answer Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recurring approaches Display completed question message
70. is whether or not CheckBox is marked after Object loads up Checkbox Display description Description text Description text Description margin Description location Use Display tab to specify the field appearance The essential CheckBox is Show description In case it is not marked all other tab parameters are disabled for editing therefore only CheckBox will be displayed on the Slide In case Show description CheckBox is selected you can input description text into the field which is in Rich Text Format mode If needed modify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between CheckBox border and text Additionally you can specify position right or left of the text description with regards to the CheckBox Radio Button Group Use sound effects Click sound oh On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Even
71. lastState Last state action one of action token short names OBJ ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited OBJ ID queue 5 3 11 4 Talking Head type 2 The Talking Head is an animated character with a set of basic Actions these Actions can be launched using Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module tinal David James Johnny Example of Object Malcolm Object parameters Talking Head type 2 6 characters Character Display mode Background color The Talking Head is actually a Flash movie so its appearance and display parameters can be manipulated in a similar manner In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture the situatio
72. method NEXT ITEM will be used The only parameter here is Display first item automatically Select Effects tab Bullet List Parameters Disp Use transitions Transition Wipe right Duration SEC Cees Cases ee In case Use Transitions check box is marked on Effects tab you can choose any of the standard transition effects Positive numbers greater than 0 are used to set Time of the transition in seconds LIMITATIONS Due to lack of transition support in some browsers transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer Bullet List Use sound effects tem display sound Standard 1 Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using method
73. modified using methods Method name Execution Result CLOSE Closes the object REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 13 2 Relief Text Box Relief Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with convex border Compared to embedded regular text box this Text Box enables using special effects and scrolling for text occurrence Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example soss_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Example of object appearance Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Quick brawn fox jumps over lazy dog Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Object parameters Relief Text Box Parameters Effects Inner margin piels Sie L_ Close box on mouse click Cancel Select c
74. moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Search Popup Window Window Button Styles Sound Use default slide icon set ee rae anal Search options Enable case sensitivity selection Enable search logic selection By default Lase sensitivity search logic we Search scope Results format The Search tab contains options for search processing You can disable user controls for selecting case sensitivity and search logic selection in this case user cannot change these settings in the search form and default search settings will be applied in every search e Case sensitive option sets default case sensitivity for search process e Search logic defines search inclusion in case user enters more than one word in query Any word means that all Slides or Objects containing any of eneterd words will be found i e OR operation All words means that only Slides or Objects containing all of enetersd words will be found i e AND operation e Search logic SCOPE means the scope to which Search logic will be applied Slide or Object e Search results can be presented as simple links or links with short text fragment Search Popup Window ty a_i oO man wneer OU can Use wWiacands i Slides found No results found Empty query nothing to search On the Texts tab you can def
75. not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Multiple Select Question Button skin Use custom timer colors Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color Unchecked spot Checked spot On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Multiple Select Question 120 aha z4 a MouseOver z es mn eG m 12 P 12 P __ok_ Cancel J ay Hep Multiple Select Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click a
76. object appearance Object parameters Frame Navigator Begin enabled nclick disabled 0 0 Back enabled nClick disabled Pause enabled OnClick disabled Play enabled OnClick disabled Nest enabled Ontlick disabled End enabled Ontlick disabled Background color Background color Interbutton spacing By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create pictures Frame Navigator Display Sound Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 a Click sound Standard 1 a Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 10 27 Timer Timer is the special object which can be used for different time counts This object stores its State in LMS automatically if present LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Limit 45 min OO sec Left 45 min 00 sec Object parameters Timer E __ o gt Parameters Autostart when module is loaded Display time limit Display countdown from limit to zero Time limit Time
77. objects placed underneath However the objects placed on top can overlap Flash movie Compared to transparent mode Flash movie in opaque mode will always have the background color defined even if you do not explicitly specify Background color White is default color If necessary you can specify background color for the Flash movie object Display of the player controls can be further adjusted In case Movie Autostart check box is selected Video clip is launched as soon as it is loaded otherwise user should manually select Play button using video controls or object methods Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism IMPORTANT Most of properties and events of this object are not native to Flash Video or Flash they are simulated by software Due to this fact and due to delays in Flash JavaScript communication some delay up to 1 sec may occur a between calling the object s method and method s execution b between changing Flash Video playing state and corresponding object s event c in changing property values Please be aware of this fact Event Triggered Upon on Playing Tick Fires every second while t
78. on the judging panel of America s Got Talent it has been announced Stern 57 who presents a daily radio show on Sirius XM will join Howie Mandel and Sharon Osbourne on Object parameters Controversial radio DJ Howard ma tT cL ak of R m m Custom color Gradient type Gradient angle ai R Border width Transition 4 Duration B Select color scheme of the Object Gradient fill will be created automatically according to selected scheme Enter header text and window text By default header is centered and has text parameters defined as default for the Module If necessary select display effect for the object This object can utilize additional efects zoom in and fly in This object can be displayed as modal i e it will be displayed as only active object all other objects will be dimmed Text window Sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Since object has its own closing mechanism it is capable of generating the closing Event While building Frame we can use closing event for initiating various actions Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text After text is refreshed Re
79. parameters simple List Display mode tem display delay In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay in seconds simple List Display first item from the start Cece Coy Cee Third mode On external call means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object s method NEXT ITEM will be used The only parameter here is Display first item automatically In case Use Transitions check box is marked on Effects tab you can choose any of the standard transition effects Positive numbers greater than O are used to set Time of the transition in seconds simple List LIMITATIONS Due to lack of transition support in some browsers transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer simple List Use sound effects Display item sound Standard 1 Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual beh
80. part of the window containing the main text is usually white Input text for the header and the main part of the window By default title text is centered and has a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module You can change these settings while in editing mode Specify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block Define window closing rule it can be closed by clicking on pop up window Close button which looks similar to conventional Windows Close button or by clicking anywhere within a pop up window Note you can omit selecting closing rule but in this case it will be your responsibility to define closing procedure Depending on the purpose of inserted pop up window it might be necessary to disable display of pop up right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of pop up window If necessary select display effect for the object This object can utilize additional efects zoom in and fly in This object can be displayed as modal i e it will be displayed as only active object all other objects will be dimmed Standard popup window Use sound effects Click sound Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Since object ha
81. placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Min of variant weights minimum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of variant weights average of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of all variant weights sum of all selected variant weights regarding full number of variants will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Base weight of a question attempt base number of points for the question or attempt for regression method This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question If fixed crediting method is used the base weight of question equals the total score 3 The following crediting methods can be used o Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight O Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters
82. same ratio e By half width Image width will be scaled to the half of Object work area width height will be scaled in the same ratio e No scaling Image will be displayed in its original size Note that if Image width or height will exceed work area size clipping may occur This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state B Testing indicates that a cat s vision is greate Sound file Guide mark ID ID of corresponding Guide Mark Object Description full text that will be displayed in Description Area of the Object when corresponding Guide Mark is selected This is Rich Text field it can contain pictures tables links etc Scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Description Area size For each element you can define sound file with narration Display this Mark selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Description selected from the start In case no Mark is selected first element will be selected by default In case more than one Mark is selected first selected element will be active others will be ignored Display controls ribbon Title test Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Custom fant Font style On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Display background Fill color HCCC Gradient calor HEEEEEE
83. select location of the file in corresponding field and press Next License on this computer will be activated 12 2 2 Temporary detaching of the license Software key HASP SL allows detaching the license from Host computer and attach it temporarily to another computer maximal detach period 9999 days After you detach license CourseLab application on Host computer stops at the selected detach period automatically Terms Recipient computer is the computer to which the detached license is or will be attached Host computer is the computer where CourseLab was installed and activated initially IMPORTANT License can be temporarily detached only on the Host computer There s no possibility to detach license from Recipient computer and attach it to some third computer i e cascade detach If you need to attach license to some third computer return it to Host first and then start usual detach procedure for another computer License Detaching process consists of these steps Creating ID file on Recipient computer To create ID file which is needed to introduce Recipient computer to Host select in the CourseLab application on the Recipient computer menu option Help gt License gt Create ID file ID file creation wizard opens up Create the computer ID file Choose location where the computer ID file should be created Create ID file and transfer it to Host computer Creating H2R file on Host computer To create H2R Hos
84. set out to cause controversy Group Group Object parameters E Restore object state Apply On the Elements tab you can define list of groups elements in groups and their descriptions This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state In the Group Edit dialog you can fill in all elements for this group its color scheme oO Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Group name Group elements list Display this element selecte No oO Howard Stem Description text Controversial radio DJ Howard Stem is to rep Sound file Tab text short text that will be displayed on the Tab Description full text that will be displayed in Description Area of the Object when corresponding Tab is selected This is Rich Text field it can contain pictures tables links etc Scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Description Area size For each element you can define sound file with narration Display this tab selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Tab selected from the start and also displaying its preview in Edit mode In case no Tab is selected first Tab will be selected by default In case more than one Tab is selected first selected Tab will be active others will be ignored Shadow strength Font Custom fort Font size Font style Font Custom fant Font size Font style Sel
85. state can be viewed via browser http localhost 1947 Functional key will be listed as on the picture below E C localhost uw Ok Sentinel HASP Admin Contre Center A ee Sentinel HASP F Loestian Wendar HASP Key Key Typa Vema Sesa 1 is 1 Local T63 16543907190 HASP SL PURSE Keya Products Faatasi UU pecan Aart ec IMPORTANT Software key will be listed anyway even if it is not activated yet Unlike hardware key which is activated by supplier software key is always exists on the computer but needs to be activated to use it 12 2 1 License activation On first launch of installed CourseLab application License Activation Wizard will be displayed If you have hardware key USB dongle insert it into free USB port wait a little while key will be constantly lit with red light and press Next button to start using CourseLab If you have software key HASP SL then select Software Key option and press Next button On the next Wizard screen you will be asked to select activation method via Internet or E mail Activation via Internet This method is preferrable because it is very simple If your computer has Internet connection select Via Internet checkmark and press Next button IMPORTANT While activating HASP driver will try to connect with CourseLab Licensing Server using secure HTTPS protocol port 443 Server address is https hasp courselab com If your firewall or oth
86. switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin H3 OcTanoch NONbITOK CTBETb TE Ha BCE BONpOChI ANA NORENE Bpema Ha Bonpoc Bpemia Ha TeCT MHH OTBEYEHO BONpOCOB BENEHO OTBETOB Bonpocos C BBEQEHHbIM OTBETOM TECT SaKOHYEH TECT SaKOHYEH NosTopHbI npoxog Ebi xOTMTe NpoliTM STOT TECT SaHoBO Crea Bonpoc CnenynowjMl Bonpoc PHHATe oTBeT MpHHATe oTBeT puen On Instruction and Texts tabs you can change text constants that are used in the Object Napametper Mlomnoxxa Tekcmi En Bb5op Bbi eprhTe O0MH BApHAHT OTETA MHO BbiBOp BRIE Te OAH HNA HECKONbKO BApHAI YNOpPAAOYHBAHNE PaCCTaBLTE BApHAHTbI B NpaBHNbHOM Yvcn Seog BBE OMTE YACNOBOE SHaYEHHE TEKCTBEBON Beemte CTpOkYy lapHoe coom CoepHHTe Napbl NPaBHNbHO NepeTact Pexim npocmoTtpa FEXHM MPOCMOTFA Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Test Displayed Test is fully loaded
87. text area is quite small please keep this text as short as you can It cannot be distributed in few lines one line only Long texts will be cut Please use description for long texts WARNING Choosing font parameters please make sure that you have selected fonts which are installed on learners computer Otherwise browser will use its default fonts and object appearance will be distorted Description any rich text description that will be displayed in special description block near the histogram Preview description in editor checkbox allows to preview diagram with one of the description blocks displayed in edit mode if this checkmark is set on more than one sector only first description will be displayed Histogram Chart Elements Description Axes Background Sound Display element descriptions Color scheme Custom colors Use solid fill for description black Fill color main Fill color gradient Gradient angle Border color Border width Comer arc size 0 1 Description inner margin Display description on mouse click Display pointer line to element Use transitions on description Transition Duration On the Description tab you can switch displaying of description blocks on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e bo
88. the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating even
89. time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Text Fill In Blank Question Button Texts sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Credit question Scoring type Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed oO regressive Question objectives Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to ke
90. to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 2 I Background Icons block Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size from Oto 1 Inner margin px On the Images block tab you can switch displaying of image block on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 2 Icons block Background Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin Block height Interblock spacing On the Caption tab you can switch displaying of description block on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 2 Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gra
91. we Font Level elements F a bage Font style j etc s JC OOD Border width px Be ji Border color 999999 Normal seman J e0 Fill color gradient Interelement spacing oi Gradient angle You can use one of predefined color schemes or select custom colors in this case color values from the right part of dialog will be used Define font parameters in the right part of the dialog they will be applied to short text on the elements WARNING Choosing font parameters please make sure that you have selected fonts which are installed on learners computer Otherwise browser will use its default fonts and object appearance will be distorted Add level elements Hement ID Sond o _ Preview description in editor OK Cancel Element ID any unique for this object sequence of latin characters and numbers reserved for future use can be blank Element text short text on the arc inside the sector Font parameters from right part of the Level dialog will be applied to this text LIMITATION length of the text arc is quite small please keep this text as short as you can It cannot be distributed in few lines one line only Long texts will be cut Please use description for long texts Description any rich text description that will be displayed in special description block near the pyramid You can also attach sound file to each element swf or mp3 wma wav
92. weights average of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of all variant weights sum of all selected variant weights regarding full number of variants will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Base weight of a question attempt base number of points for the question or attempt for regression method This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question If fixed crediting method is used the base weight of question equals the total score 3 The following crediting methods can be used o Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight O Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective 4 Possibility to Skip the
93. will remain intact Example of object appearance Controversial radio DJ sales Stern i isto replace Piers Morgat judging emma Got Talent it ria issa announced mM Stern 57 who presents a daily radio show on Sams AM will jom Howie Mandel and Sharon Osbourne on the team and said it was likelv that feelngs are soing Object parameters Gradient box Text Inner margin Vert alignment Color scheme 6080b0 Gradient type Simple Gradient angle 0 deg Border width pa E Close box on mouse click To input text into the text box press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text therefore all font settings size color and style will be Saved as you type the text in YcTaHoBuTe NapamerTpbi BHewHero Bnga Select color scheme of the box with respect to the overall design If needed modify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between box border and text This Object always has size of its placeholder scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Object size Vertical alignment is applicable only if text size is less than Object size If appropriate checkbox is marked text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a box Gradient box Display shadow on mouse over Shadow strength Normal E Use fly in Right Normal Use zoom in Zoom in direction Zoom in speed
94. 10 4 MODIFYING CAPTURE SETTINGS WHILE IN CAPTURE MODE sscscsscscsscecnseecnccesnscesnccesecseecsseeseseesnseesaseeseseeseseseuceseeses 555 1025 PARTIAL SCREEN CAP TUR RE E EE E E E EAEE AE E EA TE A 558 1O EDITING CAPTURED FRAME Suiriri a E aia octave A T E E N eas 559 TLIMPORT FROM POWERPOINT sissscscievsacs cans sevndineievecawwnrseiuawsccncavedesideawa wave case aseucueveavouasnarsucnewadvecaveadddceneareucaeusaus 561 TFELIMPORT FROM POWERPOINT WIZARD sinc csctec vad duce crscy nudes a nn dean siag st ts auledeurnsaoan das nd dean seag ind aN 561 12 LICENSE MANAGEMENT arseenin Senda Gcewuns scab Wadebiaaseee soaabiensauanendoeeatied swansea euaasenads 565 12 LHASP HOKEY USB DONGLE acccvacssactinc osQussacusaetinciuaduaurdusautannensO ea vedesensusaantueuadurantwaqnatas adhd auliecbusdenuadvsauinaencQusueaeous 565 T22 AASP SLCKEY SOFTWARE KEY sccadacasrrcicsaaucuuteies in O E ands tadiaceaatoustactigaad 565 P22 R A GCE VU ON PEA ANE AT A EE AE E E E S TE A EEA EE E AA TTE T 566 122 2 temporary detaching Of ENC HCONS E cigs se riaa T N T E T AO 567 1223 Relurn of hedetached licens E nrinn TE acwe aaa anita 568 1224 cense degctUvot ON vrea e T a E a et Nia ee ins ape sar e setae 569 T23 COURSELAB REGISTRATION nornen a a a a EE Aa a E 571 1 What is CourseLab CourseLab is a powerful and easy to use eLearning authoring system that offers programming free WYSIWYG environment for creating high quality interactive eLearning content which ca
95. Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ID queue 5 3 11 7 Arabian An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so
96. CourseLab 2 7 User Manual TO WHAT IS COURSELAB aooiie eroian a oa aaaea Nea AEN a aN paaa a a a ap a 5 LL IKEY FEATURES OF COURSE ABE cc tra ceca aT EEE N T TA O a TO A O ATOT 5 147 SYTEM REGUIREMENT S cinsin A A E EA tse atau shana tans oe 5 LS COMPLIANCE TOTHE STANDARDS itrio ernn a E TE 6 ISA COUR SEEAB AND LM S erennere r EE AE T E EEA 6 DAINTEREACE ohio sone duaSensbeascewesssnedeueeceaseneueeusiune 7 2 COUR GE PANE nononono antes sncteuguoacsauansnaceuassncanGanacouaduaciauae nnscee gis se uma eacciw atone auansaaceue stauaeGesarcnag sadsnasseacounctacceuns sack 8 2 2 NIGDULE WINDOW siete idedcels atetei vate E N N ade Tecan cus vaded deuce eyue TO occas 9 23 ASK PANE EAE nde Coaute secant E ETT wreneauedeceavuacuacseustantiaaneds 10 P AAA AE AEREE A ANE E AE A AE A NEE ETE Wie scales ea AEE A E ESAT AEE A ALEE E AA E E AA 11 23 AOP ECOLO OV ir EEA N ETAO TE ET ATE T N T E 11 De C DATT A AAE elosbaddaa abana aniadduaaiideas elouiadaaauscede er me ansantem tetera 12 2 A AUTOS RO DES ei renee nets ty Vee man ices encaee E ET sg uti tas Nocera se aims eae E E ae Morrah i ia 12 DDD SCON OOS facto sis vesscuaitawscaauscey a a a oe oie AS aeRO Cai adas atte d aE ase ea eho aA 13 2950 DESIG TEMPIA ES arrr n T wes nate ssi tna ead ead a ede ee OAS 13 3 WHAT IS ELEARNING COURSE cscs icsecaccccseuscs cosacacecsuan ces a a a se csweesse Guucesuennseoaeuecsaeseeasewescoussacscoesss 14 SU WIQDULE sseacuecceasatesnceesesesraieGeoeyctaouane cease fe
97. DE Example of object appearance Object parameters Next Slide Button i Parameters Sound Tve Use default button set Enabled button tooltip Disabled button tooltip Access is not allowed Strict Navigation mode Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button e The fourth picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Next Slide Button Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 s Click sound Standard 1 st Cancel On the Sound tab
98. E MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Contents x First Slide gt gt Second Slide Second Slide s Child Object parameters Contents Popup Window Sound Use default border color Header text Window size hor vert pa Window position hor vert pa In the opened dialog you can select the border color for the results window with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Also you can modify title text and style You can modify size and location of popup window with respect to the design of the learning Module however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes Contents Popup Window Use default button set Enabled button C Courses 2 6 PG cad OnMouseOver button resi 6_ PG OnClick button C Courses 2 6 PG Disabled button resiz PG Window close button CA Courses 6 PG a Enabled button tooltip Contents Disabled button tooltip Access is not allowed Close button tooltip Close Contents window Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following five pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the fi
99. ET NEE EEE N E 502 6 1 2 Border and Fill colors OPACIY neriinciriierciritariiaeiiiiinni ed i eai a ed a a 502 CL REIZ ODJ ECT r E T O N O E O E T TO 503 6 1 4 IVIOVING ODJEL S r E EE ENNA AREE O ONEA EE OOOO 505 ELSAN OJ CGS Cirer a pated UL Sto a a Oa 506 GLORKRONO ECI oenn a A ete Petit nbie 2a ava vje oa seen dete od trees alow ON eens 507 6 1 7 CNANGING ODJECES Z O GE ears lev Grcinota cies yew sang wan ace Mea ea Gee cat due R A E 508 6 2 CONTROLTING DISPLAY TIME vs cane teivadscatuscesculsvadeniwuscesden vada renteran aellabisdad buuicaamavi N 509 ODE COS sete teicds terrae os satan cited ec tadetteuaaucietec saute canter ne daeecaanouinei E A A 509 672 2 ODICCES DISDIGY TING rarr tusties can cen tes TT TETEE TE OT Es T E O TA 510 O23 ENE PON Cy casted reas pirne anid cage erig eae GENE EER AGE 511 6 5 OBIECT PROPERTIES cacharmedeossutt sans ocetaeet eden cccuarcrn tienen E sean aattnnm ms E sacunatt enn ccsaestnatesecenbnts 512 63 1 COMMON ODJECE PIO Delle cet ne E TET A EA EN OT 513 6 3 2 Specific Opject Propertie S sniene inni E EE EA T T N aeeaaeeis 513 6 4 BINDING SOUNDS TO OBJECTS irirna aaaea A O AE AARE 513 TANIMA TION cisrenan anaa a aaa a aa E 514 7A ISING FRAMES ie2coniviiscdia len aara aon e A O RE a EOE K A a EEEE AEE 514 TZ RAME DISPEAY TIME ge ccatces en nE N EE E A a 515 SEVENITSAND ACTIONS cenrnnanoa a a a a 516 O EVENT Sarei irre aE T E T E E ON 516 Belt Solde ana Frame EVENTS oira A T TE E EE T I T T 516 8 L2 EVENTS COMMON L
100. ETION STATUS action executes set of dependant actions depending on the Completion Status of the specified objective You can use ELSE action to form alternative action sequence i e when condition is not met IF_ COMPLETION_STATUS objectiveid Objective select Status Parameters Objective String Identifier of the objective Completion Status of which must be verified Status Token Can have one of the following values Value Description Unknown Completion Status is unknown Not Attempted Completion Status of selected objective has value Not Attempted Incomplete Completion Status of selected objective has value Incomplete Completed Completion Status of selected objective has value Completed Remarks Set of actions dependant to IF COMPLETION STATUS action must be indented on one position to IF COMPLETION STATUS action 8 2 10 IF SCORE IF SCORE action executes set of dependant actions depending on the Score or subset of Score of the specified objective You can use ELSE action to form alternative action sequence i e when condition is not met IF SCORE objectiveid Objective edit Source select Condition edit Score Parameters Objective String The identifier of the objective the score of which will be verified Source String or expression must have string value Specifies the source of the current score verification i e objective s score subset identifier If this parameter is omitted then objective s total
101. F5 Test Module fools Module Window Help A J View Module View Slide Shift F5 Update Objects Delete Unused Files Design Settings Alt F7 Runtime Settings Module will be loaded into separate Web Browser window of defined size To preview editing slide select Module gt View Slide or press Shift F5 Test Module Module Window Help eT View Module F5 View dide Shifters Update Objects Delete Unused Files Design Settings Alt F Runtime Settings Module will be loaded into separate Web Browser window of defined size and automatically advances to selected slide 4 4 Adding Modules Upon creation new Learning Course it contains only single Module In case it is not enough you can add required number of Modules and group them into the Chapters To add new Module to the Course you can either select File gt New gt Module or use context menu by right clicking on the name of the Course from the Course Pane Add required number of Modules and fill them with the learning content 3 70061004 CourseLab Test Module Edit View Insert Format Tools Module Window Help _ Course Ctrl Shift N O Modden Folder Ctrl Shift S Course Runtime Settings Publish Course Recent Courses Exit 3 70061004 CourseLab Test Module File Edit View Insert Format Tools M Ue el amp Fa e3 8 bal E H e m amp a Cou
102. Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Matching Groups Question Button exis Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Display corect answer Prev Corect answer F Incorrect answer Incorrect C No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal pa Offset verti
103. Flash movie In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent See detailed description of object control in Agent document Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Agent Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another W
104. ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns Returns current question mode tokens normal review text Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current question field value if there is more than one input field then returns string values delimited by Returns current number of attempts left Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 7 Matching pairs one to one Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Matching Pairs type of questions require from the user to match the provided question items on one to one basis LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance IMPORTANT Matching pairs type of question is space consuming when placed into the Frame therefore we do not recommend setting the width of the object to less than 700 pixels Question is Scored Connect events with corresponding dates Connect pairs to match correctly Discovery of America 1903 T First airplane 1945 First man on the Moon 4969 The end of World War I Attempts 3 Question time limit
105. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Matching Pairs Question Button Texts sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Scoring type Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed oO regressive Question objectives d be Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and so forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type There are 3 options for this question type o Question weight in c
106. If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture the situation when we have both a question and a Talking Head character presented in a Slide The Talking Head s task is to be amazed when the provided response to the question is incorrect Test Course First Slide Meow is the cry of Cal Cow Here is the sequence of the necessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object taal eo e oF Al Objec Action METHOD bject 0BJ_17 Method PefomAction CALL CHECKHIT DELAY DISPLAY ondrop nee ondragout ondragover ELSE beforedisplay EXTERNAL URL afterdisplay FOR GOTO On Display Question Ic On Change Choice On Attempt On Success On Failure On Time Out IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP MSGBOX On Attempts Limit On Skip Question On Question Answered we NAVIGATION RETURN ROTATE START ROTATE STOP mM li gt 2 Select On Failure in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters
107. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective 4 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Multiple Select Question _ Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display F Display corect answer Prev Corect answer F incorect answer Incorrect F No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal pa Ofset vertical pot Feedback box width px _ Hide feedback automatically Backgroun Border Button om ore Emm fms G ren ren C roms oreo jaro ren roms ore Tsou srren aran eee C Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will
108. L or file which you are going to open Set appearance parameters if necessary Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result REPLACE SOURCE Replaces URL of IFRAME content 5 3 4 Questions The current version of CourseLab supports the following types of questions You can insert a separate question of certain type as well as test using Test Object which contains combination of the above listed questions 5 3 4 1 True False True False Question object enables user to choose one correct item from two predefined possible answers LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance Credited question ls the cat mammal Choose one variant No Attempts 1 Time limit M 6 sec Object parameters True False Question Button Texts j Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Question text Varant True Varant False Vanants layout Horizontal Variants order True False Corect answer me Weight of True Weight of False To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Select variants layout order and correct variant Note that the object allows to use different weights for each variant correspondin
109. Method name Execution Result CLOSE TAB Closes the object REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 5 3 Text Popup Window Such objects as Pop up windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the Slide Basically text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the similar Balloon type of objects Therefore Pop up window can be activated by clicking on the link or button It does not close automatically it remains open Compared to Balloon type of object Pop up window type has it s own windows closing mechanism Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example sOBJ_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Example of object appearance Header text E4 Controversial radio DJ Howard Stern is to replace Fiers Morgan
110. O Gil ODJECE aira a e RE ne een sata na ERANO AAEE E A ETR 517 8 1 3 CUSTONTODJECE EVOM seglacncewaveneeusacctaduecwedons ARE EONA EA OEO A EAA T i a 519 B14 USING KEVOOOlO CVCIIES croeas e R T E E O EA dane a aes 519 OZ ACHONS Siers ereamuct canes seiGeces vot E NAER EEE E EEEE E EE E E EE stumtaence Gute 522 EA TEXTERNACURT ier ee a eee cee 523 RETOURN ener eae E A A O E E eee eee O ener re renner 523 soy ire ROTATE ESTAR Ta E a a a a EN 523 B25 ROTATE S STOP ara E E vs ceo ras E R EONA 524 o ASE 2 BF EAA EE EEE I E S EIA MUR AEE EIAN A IEAA ASE E T E AAA ETE EE ES 525 82 O MOVES STAR Tirra E OTE E T EA T E OOTA 526 8AF MOVE S TOP rians aE AA O ATAA A TAA N ATO 527 P a A E ANIENTAR EEIT E EAE wate E EEA E E AE A EAE PEI EA E AAEE E E A E 527 8 2 DIF COMPLETION STATUS erieeiiir ccc E AE ONR IOE OEE TEER ca adaa neat oor emeeen 528 DLO Ti SCORE ii E E E E E A E E N 528 pA LAP SI CCESS STATUS rin vanced EEEE O O I E OE ONO OE ON A R 529 821 25E COMPLETION STATUS wasucsnccmacusoutinsessy pau eaten usuaau cacao anions E vacwatanewnddou uneven AT 530 S71 SOO IND ses dnacesa sora aen ca aageea a ATS 530 E ZAE E ae ee eS OLE Pt Ot One PPT TORS PELE ORT PT Oe OPE Re ee MPEP N et ae eo nT Te TOT fer ere eee eee eT rn Toe 531 SZ I3 METHOD eek oE tiene lea etd RCE ALR ROLE RE RS 531 eZ VOI VGA Oe eciaceaegee ie ccs ed eae latest sig os cua nee Gl oe eto eg os a bs vate ee neta wav tu ea 532 82 17 FA Td terse caso leet sect ot Cae dust deeb ates AAE A aS
111. OBJ ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all tabs have been visited 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 1 11 Managed tab block Accordion Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block This type of Object its own Controls ribbon with Next Previous buttons Example of object appearance Controversial racho DJ Howard Stem is to replace Piers Morgan on the judging panel of America s Got Talent t has been announced Stem 57 whe presents a daily racio show on Simms XM wi jom Howie Mandel and Sharon Osboume on the team l The star has vowed to give honest opamons and sand i was bkely that Teelngs are going to be hurt An onginal shock jock Stem has often been in trouble for off colour remarks and comuc transgressions Despite his sometimes offense and often sexual language the DJ says he does not deliberately set out to Object parameters Managed tab block Accordion Hements list E Restore object state On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state Howard Stem Controversial radio DJ Howard Stem is to reg Tab text short text that will be displayed on the Tab Description full text that will be displayed in Description Area of the Object when corresponding Tab is select
112. Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open O otherwise SOBJ_ID open 5 3 10 5 Help Tab Help Tab object enables displaying the Help text block for the Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance MS First Slide Test Course Help eLearning Module Structure Learning Module is a fundamental building block of the Course hierarchy representing the set of author structured Slides During the learning process the learner is led from one Slide to another sequentially which is default behavior Slide Interactive page is the main building block of Learning Module Slides are used by the author to place learning material tests and exercises The order of Slide correlation is predefined by the author Navigation eLearning Module navigation controls the list may vary depending on author s design Prev and Next buttons enable to jump on previous and next slide correspondingly Replay button enable to start current slide once again from the beginning it may be u
113. R is used for executing dependant actions specified number of times e JAVASCRIPT enables execution of custom JavaScript code e Z INDEX defines absolute or relative z index of the object e Using Expressions in Actions e Using Keyboard events 8 2 1 EXTERNAL URL EXTERNAL URL action enables opening resource external to the Learning Module in the new Browser Window EXTERNAL_URL edit URL Parameters URL String or expression must have string value URL for opening in the new Window URL should be specified with respect to the Internet addressing rules specifying the protocol for example http www courselab com 8 2 2 RETURN RETURN action performs transition to the Slide where action CALL was previously executed RETURN Parameters No parameters 8 2 3 ROTATE START ROTATE START action initiates object rotating LIMITATION Objects rotation is supported only by Microsoft Internet Explorer LIMITATION The object which can be dragged by mouse i e corresponding checkbox in Object properties is checked can not be turned or moved For this type of objects MOVE START action will be ignored ROTATE START objectid Object edit Angle select Additive time Duration Parameters Object String The identifier of the object which will be rotated Angle Number or expression must have numeric value Indicates the angle in degrees and direction of rotation Positive value refers to rotating clockwis
114. SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Text Fill in Blank types of questions require from the user to fill in the correct answer into the blank spaces using the keyboard In general entered text can contain numbers but when user s response is evaluated numbers are interpreted as text characters rather than numbers LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance Question is Scored Alice in Wonderland was written by Enter text string Enter name and surname Lewis Carroll Attempts 1 Question time limit M 3 eec Object parameters Text Fill In Blank Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Question text Variants Explanation Max size 10 Help To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Specify the approximate length of the entry field in symbols We recommend allowing some extra space for that purpose If necessary enter description message for the answer field Description message appears to the left of the answer field and may contain answer format instructions for example Use capital letter to answer Specify conditions for the correct answer Use menu button to add conditions to the list of condition
115. Specify method of transition to the next Frame Advance setting By default transition to the next Frame takes place upon expiration of the frame s display time setting Immediate Alternative setting is Wait for Action it means stopping upon finishing frame s display In this case creation of action which will trigger transition to the next Frame will be of your responsibility 8 Events and Actions All interactions between Objects in CourseLab learning modules are based on the Event Action mechanism An Event is a signal originated either by the Object or during the course by the user Generally Events are generated when the state of an Object changes for example at the moment of Object appearance otherwise Events are generated externally for example by mouse click on the Object Events are used for triggering Actions when creating relationships inside a Module Actions are predefined changes of an Object state and or Module variables which are used for creating complex Object behavior The Events are used to trigger execution of Actions The Event source could be 1 aFrame ora Slide 2 one of the Objects on the Frame In the first case All Events are generated by the CourseLab player in the second case the common Events for all Objects are generated by the CourseLab player and all Object specific Events are generated directly in the Object s code For illustration purposes and to better under
116. Success Completion Completed Objective Completion Using of the last three above mentioned checks for creating Rules allow building cascading Rules when status of the single objective depends on the statuses of other objectives 10 Screen Capture Learning courses are created for many purposes One of the most common objectives is instructing on how to use various software To facilitate the creation of software simulations CourseLab contains built in screen capture mechanism therefore no additional software needs to be installed Simulations are recorded directly into the internal format of the editor and can be edited later as usual frames Internet Browser s capabilities allow replaying of such animated simulations No additional components Flash Player Shockwave Player Media Player etc are required LIMITATION Screen Capture may not capture some menus on computers with Aero themes enabled Windows Vista Windows 7 It is recommended to switch into any non transparent theme for example Classic to capture screens with open menus 10 1 What needs to be done prior to recording the simulation Create a learning Module or select an already created one to insert the simulation into Select or create a new Slide for placing the simulation The Editor allocates each simulation session into a single Slide and automatically adds necessary frames there is no need to add frames manually Define the size of the free space
117. Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ ID curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ D queue 5 3 11 3 Agent type 2 An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Malcolm Betty David James Johnny Mary Object parameters Animated agent type 2 6 characters Parameters Character Background color You can specify an Agent s appearance and display parameters similar to Flash movie display settings in fact an Agent is a Flash movie In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture a situation when we have both a question and an Agent character presented in a Slide The Agent s task is to applaud when the provided answ
118. The GIF animation will display properly when the course is published JPG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPG is one of the most common formats for graphic images on the Internet and is supported by all Browsers and most graphic editors When JPG compression is executed the source image is divided into square blocks with specific color and brightness information so called chrominance luminance scheme created for each block which enables coding of this area The human eye is more sensitive of them to the details of shapes than to color information therefore JPG compression reduces color information to Variable size while using 256 grade brightness scale The degree of color information depends on the user defined quality setting Having said that JPG format is very practical for displaying smooth color transitions and well suited for compressing photos and pictures with high color gradient areas However if the source image has multiple contrasting color changeovers the compressed image will degrade depending on the level of compression there will be mottled areas around color s edges JPG allows the user to choose the balance between file size and image quality but choosing a higher quality can make the file size very large and slow to upload Most Internet graphics are set to 72 dots per inch dpi Unlike GIFs the JPEG format does not support transparency PNG Portable Network Graphics The Portable Network Graphics PNG format was
119. This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE LIMITATION If there will be more than one object of such type in the Module then only one of them will be used Example of object appearance Loading images 50 Object parameters Add object to the Master Slide Position it the way you prefer Open Properties dialog screen Image Loading Progress Frogress Bar Button If Display Image Loading Progress checkmark is not set then no progress indicator will be displayed at all However we do not recommend to switch it off progress indicator contains Cancel button which is very useful in case of network problems Select layout type Image Loading Progress Font size Font style Font color Text align Unloaded color Border color Border style Border width On the Progress Bar you can define parameters of progress bar Image Loading Progress Button text Font Font size Font style Font color Background color Border color Border style Border width Text align Cancel You can configure or change button and its parameters on Button tab 5 3 10 25 Alternative Path Alternative Path object allows to define alternative learning path within the Module The Module can be divided on virtual chapters each chapter can have completion conditions If this object exists in the Module then all navigation objects
120. To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Specify list of groups and corresponding matching items for each group by number in the list of matches tg ae s o E Matches t f Cancel If suitable you can define weight of each base match pair to use it in complex scoring types Unlike the group items which will be displayed in order they were inserted the matches will ALWAYS be displayed in random order Number of displayes slots on the base restricts maximal number of matches that can be attached to base It can be O no restriction there will be no match slots on the bases exact number of matches for this group in fact this is the hint for user maximal number of matches i e from group with maximal number of matches and custom Note that if the number of displayed slots is not 0 then user will see the warning No more slots message when trying to attach more matches than defined by this value Multiple Group Matching Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Set number of attempts automatically Number of attempts Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recurring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Use Limitati
121. ab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next tab if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Selects previous tab if applicable DISPLAY Selects tab that is selected in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax item Number of current opened tab starting from 1 SOBJ_ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all tabs have been visited O otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 1 12 Managed tab block Process Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block This type of Object its own Controls ribbon with Next Previous buttons Example of object appearance DJs a Controversial radio DJ Howard Stern is to replace Piers Morgan onthe judging panel of America s Got Talent it has been announced Stern 57 who presents a daily radio snow on Sirius XM will join Howie Mandel and Sharon Osbourne on the team ccalkinse are going to be hurt An original shock jock Stern has often been in trouble for off colour remarks and comic transgressions In 2004 he was dropped by media
122. al and horizontal Shadow Shift with relation to the main box as well as opacity We recommend using opacity of 40 which is a default opacity value The next check box is Shadow copies main box In case this check box is marked such shading box settings as background color style color and width of the box border will be copied from the main box settings it will look more natural when combined with 40 opacity However if you need to change shading display with regards to main block you can uncheck the Shadow copies main box check box then shading box settings become available for editing Shadow Text Box Main box Shadow Effects Typewriter speed chars sec Cancel On the Effects tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text Refreshed After text is refreshed on Text Added After text is added on Typewriter End After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character Object Methods The state of the Object can be
123. alloon Parameters Background Border color lightblue blue Arrow Balloon text Balloon inner margin pixels Help Select color scheme background border color with respect to the overall design of the Slide Press Apply button to observe changes Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text If necessary specify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between balloon border and the text After you done with parameters settings place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area Usually Balloon should open up when the user s mouse moves over that link or active area Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define onMouseOver and onMouseOut actions enabling display of Balloon 5 3 7 Design 5 3 7 1 Gradient Area The Gradient Area type of objects is generally used for decoration purposes Example of object appearance Object parameters Gradient Area Parameters Color 1 Color Direction horizontal vertical Cancel Select color for the start color 1 and the end color 2 of the Gradient areas with respect to the selected design of the Slide Click Apply to view changes Select direction of the gradient vertical or horizontal 5 3 7 2 Click Area The Click Area type of objects is used for defining transparent click area anywhere on t
124. an be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next element if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Selects previous element if applicable DISPLAY Selects element that is passed in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax item Number of current selected element starting from 1 SOBJ_ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all elements have been visited 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 1 15 Managed controls block Managed controls block is used to manage consecutive display of other Objects In case target Objects have its own methods OPEN CLOSE for example Pointer these methods will be used to display them otherwise usual action DISPLAY will be used automatically Example of object appearance Cat P Cats feed on small prey primarily birds and rodents 124 Feral cats and house cats that are free fed tend to consume many small meals in a single day although the frequency and size of meals varies between individuals 111 Cats use two hunting strategies either stalking prey actively or waiting in ambush until an animal comes close enough to be captured Although it is not certain the type of strategy used may depend on the prey species in the area with for exam
125. an or equal Less than Less than or equal Data type conversion numbers and symbols of numbers are different types of data i e in general for example 34 should not be equal to 34 first is number second is string But JavaScript programming language which is used in CourseLab runtime has automatic data type conversion feature i e 34 may be equal to 34 in conditional statement Please be aware of this feature Data types allowed for building expressions Data type NUMBER BOOLEAN STRING VARIABLE Description 0 9 any sequence of these characters true false predefined dictionary values Any character sequence enclosed in quotes or Using of and inside the string is forbidden if you need these characters to be included in string use backslash to mask them i e will mean single inside the string CourseLab run time variable value i e sign followed by variable name Characters that can be used in variable name include 0 9 a z A Z _ Note that no whitespaces are allowed in variable IDENTIFIER Used for inserting object properties in expression Syntax for object property IS Sobject_identifier object_ property where object_identifier and object_property are of IDENTIFIER data type Characters that can be used in IDENTIFIER include 0 9 a z A Z _ Note that no whitespaces are allowed Math functions allowed for building expressions a Examples of expressions
126. an switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object
127. an switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Radar Chart Description and legend Background Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click s Mouseover sound Standard 1 s Sound file Click sound Sound file On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 3 External 5 3 3 1 External File Object External File object enables opening external files such as documents pictures movie etc in a separate Browser window Example of External File appearance External File File CourseLab Guide pdf m Mouse click on icon to open file Mouse click on description to open file Underine description Cancel What types of files are supported by the Object Object is not limited by the file types At the same time Browser restricts opening some of the file types therefore in a separate Browser window you may open any file which is NOT RESTRICTED BY BROWSER Fo
128. ance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Numeric Fill In Blank Question 120 aha z4 a MouseOver z es mn eG m 12 P 12 P __ok_ Cancel J ay Hep Numeric Fill In Blank Question This question is already answered Rec This question is already answered Pres question will be treated failed Please enter only numbers and signs ok _ Cancel toy J Hee Numeric Fill In Blank Question Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Button ii Texts i Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance but
129. and second is to see test results If test is taken again all previous test results are discarded Also you can permit or restrict display of pictures related to the questions for the entire Test U6eT no Bhidopy UBeT HENDaBMABHO U set no Bbidopy WupwHa Gnora 300 MKC PATATE coobWeHHA aBTOMaTHYeCKH yepes TeKCT BpEMA BONpoca BpeMiA OTBEQEHHOE Ha BONpPOC SaKOH TekcT Bpema TecTa Bpemia OTBEDEHHOE HA TECT SAKOHYMHT You can enable or disable feedback messages Feedback messages are defined in QTI file When enabled feedback messages will be displayed in special text block you can change its width UBetToBan cxema U6eT no BbIGopy Wpect Bonpoca PasmMep n cm nb Upset wphprTa Wpwet BapMaHTa PasmMep n cm nb Fasmep n cm nb ok Omena Nomen Cnpama On the Display tab you can select basic appearance settings for the object Leet HeOTBEYEHHOrO U6eT no BbIGopy Leert oTBe4eHHoro U6eT no Bbidopy UBet npas otsey Leet no Beidopy UBet Henpas oTBe4 U6eT no Bbidopy Uber Texywero Leet no Bidopy KHonka Cren U6eT no Beidopy Tipumerm On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Control elements progress indicators and buttons LEET 33AHEKH U BET Pag Hen a LU Bet rpaHHLEI ApKocTh SANHBKH TOnWwHa rpaHMUh Yron Ppa genta Famiye CKpyrneHMA BHyTPEHHAA OTOMBKA NokaSsbIBaTb TEHb On the Background tab you can
130. answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ _ID below means current object ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns Returns current question mode tokens normal review oto Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current match item order match numbers starting from O divided by for example 3 1 0 2 0 1 2 3 in this case corresponds to correct order Returns current number of attempts left Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 8 Matching groups one to many Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Matching Groups Question require from the user to ma
131. aracters Note that you do not need to enter terms in alphabetic order they will be sorted in alphabetic order automatically for display tem ID tem tem description Cancel You can also enable displaying first letter ribbon to allow learner select all terms starting with specific letter This ribbon is created automatically Glossary Popup Window hems Window Button Sizes Sound Use default border color Border color Header text Window size hor Window position hor Window tab contains controls for popup window displaying parameters You can select the border color for the object with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Also you can modify title text and style You can modify size and location of popup window with respect to the design of the learning Module however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes Glossary Popup Window Disabled button tooltip Glossary is disabled Close button tooltip Close glossary window Strict Navigation mode Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following five pictures The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button The se
132. ard you can create new frames from captured al i w SCTEeNns To continue cick Next qeyasinoy Version 2 4 From the drop down menu select program to record the simulation from Mark Capture Cursor check box if you need to record mouse s clicks and movements Clicks and movements will be captured automatically once the recording starts screen Capture Select application window for screen capture C e mouse pointer e Captur inte Specify position for the top left corner of the area for recording simulations within a frame By default position of top left corner of the area for recording simulations within a frame is equal to top left corner of the frame position 0 0 however there are instances where it is not acceptable For example if there is a title located at the top of the frame then top left corner of the area for recording should be placed underneath by adding frame title s height in pixels into the Vertical Position field screen Capture Position and size on desktop Horizontal Width Vertical Height Define location and size of the area on the monitor to be captured The editor will try to adjust captured application window to the specified size automatically if possible Screen Capture Click Next to start screen capture After you press the Next button CourseLab will be minimized to an icon at Windows tay The red border on screen designates a
133. ase of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Sum of variant weights sum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Max of variant weights maximal weight of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Min of variant weights minimum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of variant weights average of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of all variant weights sum of all selected variant weights regarding full number of variants will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Base weight of a question attempt base number of points for the question or attempt for regression method This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question If fixed crediting method is used the base weight of question equals the total score 3 The following crediting methods can be used o Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight O Regression method In th
134. atically adjust it s size to the size of Rectangular Placeholder For example pictures and AutoShapes are always resizing it s height and width to fit the Rectangular Placeholder e Object that can resize by itself autofit to contents depending for example on the amount of the text e fixed size Object 6 1 4 Moving Objects Moving objects using mouse 1 Move mouse cursor over the object 2 Press left mouse button 3 Hold the mouse button down and then drag the cursor to the desired location in the Slide Dotted frame which is moving along with cursor indicates new location of the object s placeholder 4 Release the mouse button To interrupt relocation of the object press Esc key Moving objects using keyboard 1 Select desired object 2 Now you can control the object motion with the keyboard strokes by pressing direction keys Moving objects using buttons in the toolbar panel Move Up Selected object will be moved one position up Command is available by pressing button from the toolbar panel 4 Move Down Selected object will be moved one position down Command is available by pressing button from the toolbar panel Move Left Selected object will be moved one position to the left Command is available by pressing button from the toolbar panel Move Right Selected object will be moved one position to the right Command is available by pressing button from the toolbar panel The above men
135. ation controls the list may vary depending on author s design Prev and Next buttons enable to jump on previous and next slide correspondingly Replay button enable to start current slide once again from the beginning it may be useful for example to repeat animation on slide etc Contents tab or button with popup window displays the list of all slides and enables transition to any slide in the Module if no restrictions were applied by author Navigation drop down menu displays the list of all slides and enables transition to any slide in the Module if no restrictions were applied by author Sound On Off button toggles narration if narration exists in the Modulet Object parameters Help Popup Window Use default border color Default border color Window size hor vert px Window position hor o vert o px Strict Navigation mode Cancel In the opened dialog you can select the border color for the object with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Also you can modify title text and style You may input the Help content into the Window text field which is in Rich Text Format mode that enables insertion of the formatted text tables pictures and so on Please be advised that width of the text area is limited therefore avoid using tables and pictures that exceed 450 pixels in width You can modify size and location of pop up Help window with respect to the design
136. aves field only Example of Object appearance Object parameters Dropdown menu Runtime variable name select var Value list Description Variant 1 Variant 2 Varant 3 Variable scope Current slide Help Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variable scope Fill in the list of possible variable values Open Input screen by clicking on the icon Enter the text description for the selected value and specify value for the variable in case user selects particular menu item Specify initial condition which is whether or not Menu ltem is selected after Module loads up LIMITATION No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object Dropdown menu Border style Border width Border color Background color Font size Font weight Font style Font color Text align Use Display tab to specify the Drop down Menu display Note these settings will affect all menu items Dropdown menu Use sound effects Selection sound oh On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in c
137. avior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISPLAY NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax lastltem Returns number of last displayed item starting from 1 SOBJ_ID lastltem nextitem Returns number of next displayed item if exists SOBJ_ ID nextltem totalltems Returns total number of items SOBJ_ D totalltems 5 3 12 3 Standard List Standard List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements Object consists of Standard list items It contains the list of items with built in display manipulation mechanisms IMPORTANT Since this object contains built in display mechanisms the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame Example of object appearance Firstitem text v Second item text v Third item text Next Object parameters Standard List tems border color tems mark Checkmark wt item list
138. avorites Tools Help O Back gt wi p Search Wey a ae EX Address C CoursesWSKWSK_AICC Name size Type CH vsk_001 zip 22512KB WinZip File 4 6 6 Publication for SCORM 1 2 LMS This publication option is used to create the SCORM 1 2 standard compliant course package i e ZIP archive with course files and SCORM metadata files The course that is published using this option can be imported and used in any LMS that supports SCORM 1 2 standard Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Publish course files to O Run from CD Run under SCORM 2004 LMS Run under AICC LMS Note that the course published for using in SCORM 1 2 environment will support this standard only As a result of publication you will get the ZIP archive that contains all course runtime files and course metadata files In most cases you do not need to unzip the archive most of LMS can accept ZIP archive for importing If your LMS cannot import zipped package unzip the archive in specified folder and use imsmanifest xml file on the top level of folder to import course structure VSK_SCORM_1 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back a pa Search Wey Folders Address 0 C CoursesWSKWSK_SCORM_12 Name Size Type CD wsk_o01 zip 22512KB WinZip File i My Computer 4 6 7 Publication for SCORM 2004 LMS This publication option is used to create the SCORM 2004 standard compliant course package
139. ay completed question message Display continued question message Help Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4
140. ays in course playing 5 3 1 4 Tab block leftside tabs Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Example of object appearance Breadfruit The eggplant aubergine begun or brinjal Solanum melongena is a plant of the family Solanaceae also known as the nightshades and genus Solanum It bears a fruit of the same name commonly used as a vegetable in cooking As a Cucumbers nightshade it is closely related to the tomato and potato and is native to Bangladesh Pakistan Sri Lanka and India it is a delicate perennia often cultivated as an Eggplant annual It grows 40 to 150 cm 16 to 57 in tall with large coarsely lobed leaves that are 10to20cm 4 Object parameters Tab block leftside tabs Tab width 3 from full width Description comer arc size Border width Tab inner margin Description inner margin Intertab spacing Tab description spacing None selected text On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order Tab text Description text Sound file Color scheme Normal Border color ccccec Fill color main acccece Fill color gradient Gradient angle degrees Selected element tab and description Border color Border color normal Background color zd For each element you can define Tab text short text for elemen
141. b built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Control Started When object switches into Active mode start listening clicks on Click Accepted When mouse click is captured anywhere on the Frame Click is not evaluated yet on Click Out Of First stage of click evaluation is complete click is outside the control area Further evaluation is Control Area stopped on Click Within First stage of click evaluation is complete click is inside the control area Click will be evaluated further Control Area on stage 2 on Click Within Second stage of click evaluation is complete click is inside the Active zone i e correct This event is Correct Zone fired BEFORE any actions in Object s list are processed on Click Out Of Second stage of click evaluation is complete click is outside the Active zone i e incorrect This event is Correct Zone fired BEFORE any actions on Object s list are processed on Control Stopped When Object is deactivated Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result ACTIVATE AREA Turns the Object into Active mode DEACTIVATE AREA Turns the Object into Inactive mode DESTROY AREA DESTROY AREA 5 3 7 4 Notifier The Notifier type of objects is used to attract learner s attention to the part of the Frame There are three different shapes which can be used as optionally blinking notifier arrow transparent rectangle with vi
142. be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Avocado Breadfrut Cucumber Object parameters Glossary Ed ABCE he eggplant aubergine begun or brinjal So anum melongena is a plant of the family Solanaceae also known as the nightshades and genus So anum It bears a fruit of the same name commonly used as a yegetable in cooking As a nightshade it is closely related to the tomato and potato and is native to Bangladesh Pakistan Sri Lanka and India It is a delicate perennial often cultivated as an annual It arewwe 40 ta 150 em 14 ta S7 in ball with larna enarcaly Glossary Popup Window tem Description Avocado The avocado Persea Breadtruit Breadfruit Artocarpus a Cucumber The cucumber is a cre Eggplant he eggplant aubergine Display first letter selection ribbon Nothing is selected Select item to display description TE Lett column width 4 On the Items tab you can add as many glossary terms as you wish Each term can be explained in Rich Text description If you are planning to use external glossary calls for example you may need open some specific term description on click on the link button or image it is recommended to use Item ID unique for each term Though there is also possibility to select term by its name searching by name is generally slower than searching by ID and also may lead to error for example if term contains some specific ch
143. before answer evaluation on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns Returns current question mode tokens normal review numeric Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current question field value if there is more than one input field then returns string values delimited by Returns current number of attempts left Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 6 Text fill in blank Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity
144. bjects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed At the moment when Item begins to display on First Item Displayed Immediately after first list item is displayed on Last Item Displayed Immediately after last list item is displayed 5 3 13 Textboxes 5 3 13 1 Shaded Text Box Shaded Text Box object enables placing desired text box with modified display settings including shadow effects Compared to embedded regular text box this one enables using special effects for text appearance IMPORTANT Internet Explorer 5 5 and above should be used for correct shading display however text box will be visible in older versions of browser Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example soss_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog Quick brown fox jumps over lazy dog
145. bmit answer Submit answer over Skip question Skip question over Next question Lok J _ cance C ay Questions Limitations and scoring Feedback Messages Texts Buttons Cancel On the Buttons and Spots tabs you can define custom question and test buttons and active spots for single choice multiple select and order type of questions On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Choice Change Item configuration changed in single choice question on Select Change on Item Order Changed on Numeric Value Changed on Text Value Changed on Match Changed on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit on Question Skipped on Question End on Test Timer Tick on Test Timeout on Test End Item configuration cha
146. bundant In very bright ight the siit like iris closes very narrowly over the eye reducing the amount of light on the sensitive retina and improving depth of field Big cats have pupils that contract to a round point The tapetum and other mechanisms give the cat a minimum light detection threshold up to seven times lower than that of humans Variation in color of cats eyes in flash photographs is largely due to the reflection of the flash by the tapetum By half height By height By half width By width No scaling Custom color 980007 E Guide mark order t amp Display this element selecte Yes No No Restore object state ss On the Image tab you can define Image file place of Description Area and list of Guide Mark Objects which will be managed You can also select arrow color to make it contrast relative to the Image Image in the Object area is scaled according to selected Image scaling type select appropriate depending on Image width and height proportions Note that in some cases image clipping may occur e By height Image height will be scaled to Object work area height width will be scaled in the same ratio e By half height Image height will be scaled to the half of Object work area height width will be scaled in the same ratio By width Image width will be scaled to Object work area width height will be scaled in the
147. button tooltip Close search window Empty query Empty query nothing to search Cancel You can configure or change Search button and its parameters on Button tab e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button The fourth picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button The fifth picture displays Help Popup Window Close button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for buttons simple Search Field ills a ar R Field tab allows to change default styles for search field simple Search Field Window Button Field Use default slide icon set By default Case sensitivity Search logic Search scope Results format Link only Strict Navigation mode Cancel The Search tab contains options for search processing You can disable user controls for selecting case sensitivity and search logic selection in this case user cannot change these settings in the search form and default search settings will be applied in every search e Case sensitive option sets default case sensitivity for search p
148. c properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax item Number of current opened tab starting from 1 SOBJ_ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all elements have been visited 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 2 Data Visualization 5 3 2 1 Pie chart Pie chart circle diagram is representing percent distribution of data Each sector of the diagram is proportional to quantity it represents Example of object appearance Object parameters Pie Chart Emi Font Sound Turquoise 42 Apples Orange 36 Oranges Violet 17 Plums Define the list of sectors on the Elements tab For each data element you can assign color scheme text of sector description text and its parameters Please note that sectors are displayed exactly in the order they are entered counterclockwise from north direction Use button to open sector properties dialog Normal MouseOver Selected Hement ID w00 mana anoma Numeric value pha Font size por Font weight Bal Ww Instruction text Sound fie Ooo L Fant color _ Preview description in editor e e pa Border color Fill color main j HCCCCC E HCCCCC Fill color gradient FFFFFF Gradient angle jo deg deg jo deg ET Normal co o 4 ret a Canc You can use one of predefined color schemes or select custom colors in this case color values f
149. cal pot Feedback box width px F Hide feedback automatically Backgroum Border Button or gem gem E reo FEED C arenes C mee JC anos prrE0E0 C perese C peress C Tina prFE0E0 C presse C peresse C Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Matching Groups Question Use custom timer colors Border color Background col
150. can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Navigation menu ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Navigation menu Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _1D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ ID disabled selectedID Returns ID of current Slide SOBJ_ D selectedID selectedName Returns slide name of current Slide SOBJ_ID selectedName selectedNumber Returns number of current Slide SOBJ_ ID selectedNumber totalEntries Return total number of selector options SOBJ_ D totalEntries 5 3 10 3 Current Position Current Position object enables tracing of the Slide number against the total number of Slides LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance POSITION 1 2 Object parameters Current position Parameters Text POSITION Divider Font Tahoma Font size pixels Font style Font color Cancel By default object displays the following label POSITION N M where N is a Slide number and M is a total number of Slides You can modify text divider and some other display parameters with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties t
151. ceholder space might take some extra time e Transitions can be used not only at the time of object appearance but also at object display or closing initiated by some action 6 2 2 Objects Display Time For the objects on the Slide it is possible to define the start time for displaying the object and also the duration of the objects display Moreover it is possible to specify that object should be displayed only when initiated by certain event To modify object display start time and duration of the object display select Format item from the object context menu Format dialog screen opens up Format Display Sound Display Display s seconds Appear after 50 seconds Entrance Effect Wipe down Duration L seconds Exit Effect Duration e Object display mode You can choose one out of four options e None object will not be displayed at all This mode is used when object needs to be displayed only upon certain action from the user e Rest of Frame object will be shown from the moment display was turned on up until transition to the next Frame within the same Slide or to another Slide in case current Frame is the last one or the only one on the Slide e Rest of the Slide object will be shown from the moment display was turned on up until transition to the next Slide e Specified time object will be shown from the moment display was turned on until specifi
152. cement Use transition on columns Tanstion Duration Sec _ Display columns with delay Define the list of columns on the Elements tab For each data element you can assign color scheme text of column description text and its parameters Please note that columns are displayed exactly in the order they are entered Use button to open sector properties dialog LIMITATION Transitions work only in Internet Explorer Use default color sch Normal MouseOver Selected Use default color scheme m Font ee Column color scheme Red J Tahoma wt Tahoma ka Tahoma ie eh Column ID Font size had Column name Font weight w s Numeric value 37 Font style i ne E n mO Y Sondfles OG _ Preview description in editor Normal wt Normal mm E Border width ai al AE cL Gradient angle jo deg H E Canc You can use one of predefined color schemes or select custom colors in this case color values from the right part of dialog will be used Element ID any unique for this object sequence of latin characters and numbers reserved for future use can be blank Numeric value defines value for this element Actual height will be calculated automatically depending on selected calculation method Element text short text inside or near the column Font parameters from right part of the dialog will be applied to this text LIMITATION length of the
153. cessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object si ondrop ondragout ondragover beforedisplay atterdisplay On Display Question On Change Choice On Attempt On Success Qn Failure On Time Out On Attempts Limit On Skip Question On Question Answered w MI JaBle gt eo Object METHOD Object 0BJ_ 15 Method PerfomAction Action CALL CHECKHIT DELAY DISPLAY ELSE EXTERNAL URL FOR GOTO IF IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP MSGBOX NAVIGATION RETURN ROTATE START ROTATE STOP LLL i 2 Select On Success in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters Applaud and Return upon completion Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method ACTION RETURN TO IDLE SHOW HIDE TELEPORT EE METHOD ops o D a Peiemicin JO Action Applaud v Retum to idle state In this example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching the Action However any other Events or delayed Actions can be employed for the same purpose Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Agen
154. ch Slide and Frame of the Learning Module is generating the following two events The beforedisplay Event arises at the moment when all Objects of the current Frame are fully loaded right before displaying the first Object from the list remember that even if all Objects are to be displayed simultaneously in practice the first Object to be displayed is the one which is located underneath all other Objects Even though both the Slide s beforedisplay Events and the Slide s first Frame beforedisplay Events occur virtually simultaneously the order of triggering is as follows The Slide s beforedisplay Event will occur first and next the Frame s beforedisplay Event will follow This Event is useful for some actions that should be performed prior to any Slide Frame object creation for example setting variable value which will be accessed when Objects are created The afterdisplay Event occurs at the moment the last Object from the list on the current Frame is displayed Please note that the afterdisplay Event indicates that all Objects intended for automatic display have been displayed and this Event has no relationship with the transition to the next Frame or Slide Even though afterdisplay Events for the last Frame and Slide occur virtually simultaneously the order of triggering is as follows The Frame s afterdisplay Event will occur first and next the Slide s DISPLAY END E
155. ched in window mode and by default it cannot be overlapped by other objects Note that not all players and browsers support windowless mode however Invisible mode enables to launch player software as a hidden element This mode may be useful for playing audiofiles Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Yellow cells contain events used only for streaming media Event Triggered Upon on Playing Tick Fires every second while the player is playing media Use it with currentPosition property to create time binded actions on Change Play State Fires at the moment when playing state of the media is changed state itself doesn t matter just changed on Play Stopped At the moment when playing of media stops no matter was it learner s click or the end of media on Play Paused At the moment when playing of media becomes paused on Play Started At the moment when playing of media starts position doesn t matter on Play Begin At the moment when playing of media starts from the beginning on Play Resumed At the moment when playing of media starts from the paused state on End Of Media At the moment when playing of
156. ching Pairs Question 120 aha za a MouseOver z es mn eG m 12 P 12 P __ok_ Cancel J ay Hep Matching Pairs Question This question is already answered Rec This question is already answered Pres ok _ Cancel toy J Hee Matching Pairs Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Item Moved User moves any item on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of
157. color Arrow Balloon text Cancel Select balloon color with respect to the overall design of the Slide Press Apply button to observe changes Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text If necessary specify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between balloon border and the text After you done with parameters settings place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area Usually Balloon should open up when the user s mouse moves over that link or active area Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define onMouseOver and onMouseOut actions enabling display of Balloon 5 3 6 4 Gradient Balloon Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide In general amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small smaller than the instructions used for the similar Pop up window types of objects Balloon object is intended to open up when the user s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user s mouse moves away from the active area Therefore Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism Compared to Pop up window type of object Balloon objects can have pointer arrow some explanation on TRIGGER TEXT This is the TRIGGER TEXT for balloon Object parameters Gradient Balloon Parameters
158. cond picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button The third picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button The fourth picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button The fifth picture displays Help Popup Window Close button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for buttons St rict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Glossary Popup Window Style tab allows to change default text styles and margin for Glossary items Glossary Popup Window tems Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Ww Click sound Standard 1 a Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Opens Glossary popup window and select the term by parameter Item
159. contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variable scope Fill in the list of possible variable values Open Input screen by clicking on the icon Enter the text description for the selected value into the field which is in Rich Text Format mode Specify value for the variable in case user marks Radio Button Specify initial condition which is whether or not Radio Button is checked after Module loads up LIMITATION No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object Radio Button Group Display description Description margin Description location Cancel Use Display tab to specify the field appearance The essential CheckBox is Show description In case it is not marked all other tab parameters are disabled for editing therefore only CheckBox will be displayed on the Slide In case Show description CheckBox is selected you can input description text into the field which is in Rich Text Format mode If needed modify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between CheckBox border and text Additionally you can specify position right or left of the text description with regards to the CheckBox Radio Button Group Use sound effects Click sound oh On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to cu
160. ctions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Item Moved User moves any item on Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation on Success At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct on Failure At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect on Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined on Attempts Limit After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions o0BJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode tokens normal review SOBJ_ID questionMode questionType otm SOBJ_ID questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined SOBJ_ D questionD
161. cts in the Frame can cover screen Flash movie object Background color for the Flash movie precisely corresponds to the one selected by the user Transparent Mode Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath However the objects placed on top can overlap Flash movie In case the background color for the Frame is not defined by user and Flash movie has transparent areas then the objects layered underneath will be showing through the transparent portions of the movie Since transparent mode is resource consuming animation performance might be slower therefore we do not recommend using transparent mode unless it is absolutely necessary Opaque Mode Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath However the objects placed on top can overlap Flash movie Compared to transparent mode Flash movie in opaque mode will always have the background color defined even if you do not explicitly specify Background color White is default color If necessary you can specify background color for the Flash movie object Custom parameters can be added to Flash movie if Flash movie is designed to handle these parameters Be aware that parameter name must not contain whitespaces and special symbols and parameter value must not contain quotes left and right angle brackets Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Meth
162. d Color scheme Border width aradient angle Comer arc size 01 Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Rings Chart Color scheme Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size 1 Description inner margin Desay dessin on Display pointer line to element Use transitions on description On the Description tab you can switch displaying of description blocks on and off and define its display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin e event to start display mouse click or mouse over e display pointer line to element enables display of connecting line between sector and description block e use transitions on description enables using transitions on displaying description block
163. d color HFFFFFF Player controls h OW Specify Flash video source There are two options 1 2 Local file file will be automatically copied into the Images folder of learning Module URL full URL of movie Be aware that URL option refers to external content therefore this Video clip may become the subject for browser and Flash Player security settings cross domain security Select the playing mode Adobe Flash Player supports the following window modes for playing the movie Window Mode Always on top of all layers Flash movie plays in its own virtual window in the Frame above the core browser display window therefore no other objects in the Frame can cover screen Flash movie object Background color for the Flash movie precisely corresponds to the one selected by the user Transparent Mode Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath However the objects placed on top can overlap Flash movie In case the background color for the Frame is not defined by user and Flash movie has transparent areas then the objects layered underneath will be showing through the transparent portions of the movie Since transparent mode is resource consuming animation performance might be slower therefore we do not recommend using transparent mode unless it is absolutely necessary Opaque Mode Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other
164. d effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _1D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise SOBJ_ ID open 5 3 10 21 Search Popup Window Search Popup Window enables search functionality within the current Module Only Search button is visible in editing mode LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Search J seri Cast insenstwe Search niec ary word Object parameters Search Popup Window r w Use default border color Default border color Window size hor vert pa Window position hor vert pot Window tab contai
165. d not allow such change adjust size manually Precise sizing of the screen capture area and recording position Select Size item from the context menu In the opened window you can modify numerical values for size and position of the screen capture area screen Capture Position and size Horizontal Width Vertical 117 Height Cancel Use another tab of the Size screen to modify position of the top left corner of the area within a frame where capture recording will be inserted screen Capture Position on slide Horizontal Vertical 10 5 Partial Screen Capture In addition to capturing the entire window of the target program you can also record part of the screen capture area to the frame as a separate picture without interrupting capturing flow It can be useful for example for drop down menu imitation you can save the menu as a separate picture and further use editor s capabilities for manipulating this picture Press Shift PrintScrn combination to enter the special capture mode The target program freezes up and in addition to the red you will see the blue enclose frame indicating special capture mode oe sD a I Love You TERE You Shent Warrior The Orean Of The Dopin y Age Of Loneliness Carly s Song Out From The Ocep q The Coss Of Change
166. d or other Chapters The Chapter for the distance Learning System is a structural unit There is no information regarding state of the Chapter transmitted to the System from the Modules The system is making changes to the state of the Chapters based on state information of its Modules and other Chapters From the education methodology point of view Chapter can be represented as a series of thematically grouped lectures or lessons 3 3 Slide Slide Interactive page is the main building block of Module Slides are used by the author to place learning material tests and exercises The order of Slide correlation is predefined by the author Slide itself consists of Frames Depending on complicity the number of Frames can vary e g using animation software scenario etc can significantly increase the number of Frames Any Slide has at least one Frame Slides are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually The Module is the smallest system managed unit From the education methodology perspective Slide can be employed for expressing single point of view thought or idea with regards to the Module 3 4 Frame Frame is the smallest structural unit of the Module In order to create a Module author uses Frames as the foundation for objects Even though there is no limitation for the number of Frames within a Slide we recommend not to exceed 30 40 Frames per Slide otherwise the time elapsed for loading up the Slide could b
167. dient angle Comer arc size from Oto 1 Inner margin 10 px On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background block on and off and define its display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 2 _ Icons block Background Events with sound Mouseover sound Sound file Click sound Sound file On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 3 Pointer Pointer is used for displaying short and or long description when learner selects small active point on the slide Example of object appearance Object parameters Object consists of small round active point pointer and 2 descriptions short and long Pointer with description On the Pointer tab you can define pointer size colors one of the predefined color schemes or custom pointer description position and transition effects Pointer symbol optional symbol for example number Pointer with description Pointer li Display mode Short o
168. does not contain any specific design use any HTML editor if you need to customize its design Sees File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae O Back gt a pa Search i Folders Address C Courses WSKWSK Name Type 1 File Folder 2 File Folder C courseimages File Folder 2 autorun html KE HTML Document Tce imsmanifest xml XML Document i My Computer Place the content of this folder on the CD and use autorun html as starting point 4 6 5 Publication for AICC LMS This publication option is used to create the AICC standard compliant course package i e ZIP archive with course files and AICC metadata files The course that is published using this option can be imported and used in any LMS that supports AICC standard Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Publish course files to Run from CD Run under SCORM 1 2 LM5 Run under SCORM 2004 LMS Note that the course published for using in AICC environment will support this standard only As a result of publication you will get the ZIP archive that contains all course runtime files and course metadata files In most cases you do not need to unzip the archive most of LMS can accept ZIP archive for importing If your LMS cannot import zipped package unzip the archive in specified folder and use course descriptor file with crs extension on the top level of folder to import course structure VSK_AICC File Edit View F
169. dow consists of the two parts Slide panel and Workspace CONTERTS 4 3 3 SETTINGS ayy Workspace is used for placing Objects on the Slide Slide panel is used for displaying drafts of the Slides By clicking on the draft of the Slide selected Slide will be displayed in the Workspace To change Slides order drag selected Slide icon into appropriate place of the Slide Panel 2 Slide 2 3 Slide 3 4 Slide 4 Use tabs with images above in the top of the Slide Panel to switch views between Slide s drafts and Slide s names Use Tab and Shift Tab to move name of the selected Slide to the right or to the left accordingly In such a way you can create simple Slide s hierarchy which can be shown during playback of the Module You can also use Module window to open Frames and Timeline Panes 2 3 Task Pane Task Pane is located in the right portion of the CourseLab window The switch on top of the Task Pane enables accessing of one of the following sections of the Task Pane Frame structh Y 5 FRAME amp Objects hg OBI_15 C Groups C Scenarios Object libran Agents Balloons Design External Formi Lists Media Navigation Popup Questions ee ny Image Gallery 2 Textboxes Title Slide Visualization Se Customize Clip Art E v X Autoshapes X Scenarios A Basic Shapes WW Lines Stars and Banners X Temp
170. down Event is generated when the right mouse button is pressed down within an Object e the onrmouseup Event is generated when the pressed right mouse button is released within an Object e the onmouseover Event is generated when the mouse cursor reaches the outside border of the Object i e at the Object s Entry point e the onmouseout Event is generated when the mouse cursor reaches the inside border of the Object i e at the Object s Exit point e the ondrop Event is generated when the dragged Object is dropped It is important to understand that if one Object is dragged and dropped over another Object the second i e target Object would be the source of the generated event 8 1 3 Custom Object Events Besides general events which are common to all Objects there is a set of Objects usually these are complex Objects for example questions which can generate custom Events specific to each Object Event Ibje Action ondbiclick onilmousedown onimouseup onmousedown onmouseup onmouseover onmouseout ondrop beforedisplay atterdisplay on Question Start on Change Selection on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit on Question Skipped on Question End CALL HECKHIT DELAY DISPLAY ELSE EATERNAL URL FOR GOTO IF IF COMPLETION STATUS IF SCORE IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP
171. e mandatory fields First name Last name Country Company E Mail Phone Product Key Fill in your registration data and press Next If Internet connection is present your data will be immediately sent to CourseLab Registration Server
172. e inconveniently slow Similar to Slides Frames are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually The Module is the smallest system managed unit From the education methodology perspective Frame is not a self containing unit it is rather component of the Slide 3 5 Master Slide All the Slides for the Module are created on top of the Master Slide The Master slide is the slide that contains elements that are common to all or several slides Navigation Objects within a Module Help etc There is no limit for the number of Master Slides and hypothetically each Slide with assessment content might have a Master Slide but this is rather inefficient and must be avoided In most cases one Master Slide is enough LIMITATION Since Master Slide is background Slide it has limited functionality links hotspot areas effects display delays events and actions are not supposed to work on Master Slide Most of Complex Objects also may not work on Master Slide except for Navigation Objects which are designed especially for Master Slide 3 6 Title Slide Title Slide is an introductory part of the Module which appears on the PC screen right after launching Module Along with the introductory page the system loads the main part of module on the background which makes it convenient for user Important During display of the Title Slide introduction the main code for the module is not loaded yet therefore not all the complex obj
173. e negative value refers to rotating counter clockwise Additive Token Possible values Value Description Replace Defines absolute angle i e rotating angle will be counted from initial object s state Add Defines relative angle i e rotating angle will be counted from current object s state Duration Number Defines time of rotation in seconds Zero value corresponds to the instant rotation of the object Remarks You can rotate the object more than one full turn specifying Angle parameter of more than 360 degrees 8 2 4 ROTATE STOP ROTATE STOP action cancels object rotating ROTATE STOP objectid Object select A _ Objects Parameters Object String The identifier of the object which rotation needs to be cancelled In case rotation of all objects need to be cancelled this parameter is ignored and it may be left blank All_ Objects Token Possible values Value Description Yes Rotation of all currently rotating objects will be cancelled input value for Object parameter will be ignored No Rotation of the Object specified in the Object parameter will be cancelled 8 2 5 CALL CALL action enables transition to the specified Frame of the Slide The first parameter for this action is the target Frame identifier where transition will be performed to The second parameter allows predefined shortcuts to common values Action CALL is similar to GOTO action the only difference is that during executi
174. e Learning Management System on CD etc Hardware Software requirements This elearning Module can be played on any PC that meets requirements below Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Me NT 2000 XP limited support of Windows 95 or Linux Internet Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher recommended Mozilla FireFox 1 0 or higher Netscape 7 2 or higher JavaScript enabled XML support enabled Microsoft XML Parser 3 0 or higher recommended for Internet Explorer Additional requirements may be applied depending on media types used by Module author Object parameters About Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab Onitousel ver Tab Disabled Tab OnClick Tab Border color Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip In case the default tab is used you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color About Tab Header text Area text Strict Navigation mode You can modify header of the tab and insert short description text into the Rich Text fields Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was op
175. e block Images that are less than image block will be displayed as is no scaling If allowed user also can click the image to open original size picture in separate window Example of object appearance Wa D5 AR ER S u B lt s i krz Ey y t fi r A There are 4 configurable zones in the Object e Background blue on the picture e Images block white area with gradient where images are displayed e Caption text block below the image block with text description for each image e Buttons IMPORTANT Please take in account that each image will consume time to download and computer resources to handle Though there are no technical restrictions on quantity of images in the object you should consider possible learners computer and network restrictions Object parameters Image Gallery 1 Images list Image Description CACourses 2 6 Buran amp nbspis CCourses 2 6 Transportung E CACourses 6 Transportung E CACourses 2 6 Setting upanbsp CNCourses 6 Energia Buran CACourses 2 6 Energia Buran CACourses 6 Energia Buran CCourses 2 6 Ignition CACoures 6 Foekhali CACoures 2 6 0 Buran orbiter CACoures 2 6 Back to Earth CCourses 2 6 Buran before CACourses 7 6 Use transitions on images display Transition Duration Display orginal image in separate window Click on the pictu
176. e built in Methods METHOD objectid Object methodid Method Parameters Object String Identifier of the object which method should be launched Method Selector Method that should be launched Remarks Please note that in case the selected method has associated input parameters additional entry fields will appear for inserting method s parameters Look at object s description to get more information on its specific method 8 2 16 NAVIGATION NAVIGATION enables turning ON OFF capability for transition to another Slides of the Module NAVIGATION select Navigation_Objects select Action Parameters Navigation_Objects Token Determines the set of navigation objects that may be used for transition to another Slide which need to be enabled disabled Value Description All Navigation Objects All Navigation Objects will be turned enabled disabled Prev and Next Buttons Previous and Next Slide Buttons will be turned enabled disabled Prev Button Previous Slide Buttons will be turned enabled disabled Next Button Next Slide Buttons will be turned enabled disabled Replay Button Replay Slide Buttons will be turned enabled disabled Navigation Menu Navigation Menu will be turned enabled disabled Contents Access to Contents Tab or Window will be enabled disabled Action Token Possible values Value Description Enable Selected objects will be enabled Disable Selected objects will be disabled 8 2 17 PARALLEL PARALLEL ac
177. e counter To Number or expression must have numeric value Stopping value for the cycle counter Step Number or expression must have numeric value Iteration step for the cycle counter Scope Token Defines scope of the cycle counter variable Possible values Value Description Current Slide Variable will exist only on current Slide Entire Module Variable will be accessible for all the Slides within a Module Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by FOR action must be indented at one position from FOR 8 2 32 JAVASCRIPT JAVASCRIPT action enables execution of any custom JavaScript code JAVASCRIPT textedit Text Parameters Text Javascript code 8 2 33 Z INDEX Z INDEX action changes Z coordinate of the object i e brings the layer where the object is located forward or backward Z INDEX is not measured in pixels its value is always relative i e layers with greater Z INDEX will be located in front of layer with smaller Z INDEX Z_ _INDEX objectid Object edit Z select Additive Parameters Object String Identifier of the object Z INDEX of which will be changed Z Number or expression must have numeric value Specifies change of Z INDEX of the selected object Additive Token Defines the rule of changing Value Description Replace Z parameter value will replace current object s Z INDEX Add zparameter value will be added to current object s Z INDEX 8 2 34 Using Expre
178. e default slide icon set Display slide hierarchy Use default node icon set Strict Navigation mode Strict slide order message You cannot jump to this slide until you Cancel Use default Slides icon set marker enables you to replace Slide s icons if desired The marker Show Slide hierarchy enables to modify display mode of the Slide s structure in the Module Besides you can replace images which represents hierarchy nodes if desired Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run time settings Contents Tab Display Parameters sound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS _s Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS
179. e green icon and select Load option EE MyQuestion_1 Dialog 10 Confirm all your changes clicking OK button Your customized copy of standard Object is ready and will be displayed in Objects Library 5 4 Cursors The learning Courses designed for training on using software programs can contain software simulations Usually simulation is the sequence of the frames where mouse cursor moves to the predefined menu item then mouse click is imitated and after that the next frame displays the results of pressing on the specified menu item For mouse movement illustration the special object Cursor is employed 5 4 1 Using Cursors If during recording of simulation the marker Capture Cursor is checked cursor object will be inserted into the frames automatically However cursor object can be added to the existing frames as well To do so select Cursor item from the Insert menu irseLab Test Module Insert Format Tools Module Wir Duplicate Slide New Frame Ctrl Shift M Text Box Picture Object Timeline Actions Scenario Cursor will be placed on the current Frame Cursor movement path The blue line that comes toward cursor represents cursor movement path To change starting point of the cursor movement hold down Ctrl key and double click into the wanted point within a frame In such a way you can modify the starting point of the cursor only on the first Frame within a Slide For all sub
180. e is loading specify path in the Picture before loading field e The second picture will be displayed after the main block of Module is loaded specify path in the Picture after loading field 5 3 8 2 Title Slide Popup Title Slide Popup button and window appears on the Title Slide and may be useful for providing descriptions or help instructions Example of object appearance Object parameters Title Slide popup Use default border color Border color Popup header Popup text Popup size horiz vert piels Fopup position horiz o vert piels On open close other popups On the Popup window tab you can define popup window size and border window header and text these are RichText fields If On open close other popups checkmark is set then only one last opened popup window will be displayed Title Slide popup Use default buttons Open popup button Close popup button Open popup button tooltip Module description Close popup button tooltip By default the standard button is used If you wish to use different button then create 2 corresponding images using any graphical editor 5 3 9 Media 5 3 9 1 Flash Flash movie object is used for playing Adobe Flash Movies Adobe Flash movie files have swf extension IMPORTANT The Adobe Flash Player software should be installed on the computer for playing Flash movie You can get the latest free version of Adobe Flash Player a
181. e scope If necessary specify default text which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up If necessary you may set restrictions on user input length of value in characters Use Display tab to specify the field appearance Hidden Input Field Use sound efects Keypress sound Standard 1 aa Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Field Focus Lost At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID
182. e used within Learning Management System in the Course card 4 6 3 Course Publication Wizard Select File gt Publish Course sub menu to start Course publishing Edit View Insert Format Tools Ea Open Ctrl 0 Close bq Save Ctrl 5 Save All Ctrl Shitt S Course Runtime Settings Recent Courses H Exit In case you have not filled in Course and Modules runtime parameters yet next Wizard screens will contain fields for Course and Modules codes and descriptions Course Publication Welcome to the Course Publication Wizard With the help als of this Wizard you can store at selected location in file gt system the course in format prepared to import into Learning Management System or distribute on CD To continue dick Next qeq1 Ss1n0 Version 2 4 Click Next button Select desired publication type standard compliant package or folder for CD Use Run from CD option for any local non LMS launches Use autorun html file as starting point Please note that browser security settings may block active content from CD and local computer If you plan to proceed Course editing in CourseLab TeamWork system select Upload into WebTutor CourseLab TeamWork course will be uploaded into your server for further work Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Publish course files to Run from CD Run under SCORM 1 2 LM5 Run under AICC LMS Course Publicat
183. earance Question amp Scored Which states are in North America Select all correct variants wv Arizona W Alaska Hawaii jl Visconsin SUBMIT ANSWER Attempts 3 Question time limit i 3 sec Object parameters Multiple Select Question Button Texts Sound Question Scoring Feedback Display Question text Variants Variant Corect varant Alaska yes Arizona yes Hawaii no Visconsin yes Shuffle variants on display Variant weight is used only if comesponding scoring bpe is selected To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Use button to specify possible answers as many as needed In the opened sub dialog screen press TE button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer Select checkbox for correct answer Select Shuffle variants on display check box in case you want answers to be displayed in random order Otherwise answers will be displayed in order they were inserted Use Up and Down arrows to change order Multiple Select Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Set number of attempts automatically Number of attempts Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recurring approaches Displ
184. ect Two main types of Objects are used in the CourseLab for building up learning Module internal and complex Internal Objects are the primary and most frequently used Objects they are built into the CourseLab In fact you can create entire learning Module by utilizing only internal Objects such as e text including tables e images e autoshapes Since these types of Objects are the most commonly used the access to the Editor menu is very simple editing buttons are conveniently located on the toolbar Complex Objects are external to CourseLab and loaded into the CourseLab using the Open Object Interface For simulations of software execution the special object Cursor can also be employed 5 1 Text Text embedded into the editor object which is used for creating areas within a Frame with formatted text and tables 5 1 1 Using Text Inserting Text You can add Text to a Frame as follows select Insert gt Text Box menu option or choose Text Box icon from the toolbar Format Tools Module i New Slide Ctrl M Duplicate Slide New Frame Ctrl Shift M Picture Object Cursor Timeline Actions Scenario Area of text appears on the Slide with Enter Text instruction on it Alternatively copy desired text to Clipboard using any text editor and Paste it into the Frame Text Box with copied text will be created automatically This insertion method is more convenient to use in many ca
185. ect can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ID disabled value Returns current input field value SOBJ_ID value 5 3 15 4 CheckBox CheckBox enables user making Yes No selections Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user leaves field only Example of Object appearance iw CheckBox Description Object parameters Checkbox Runtime vanable name Value checked Value unchecked Default state Unchecked Vanable scope Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variable scope Specify value for the variable in case user marks CheckBox and when CheckBox is unchecked Default values are true false Specify initial state which
186. ect color schemes for idle and selected states one of predefined or custom You can also lighten or darken colors of selected color schemes Change Tab font settings Display controls ribbon Tithe t t Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Title font Custom fant Font style aoe On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Custom color Fill brightness Border width Margin top bottom Margin left right Use custom fill color Fill color Anny On Descriptions tab you can change display parameters for Description Area Display background Fill color HCCC Gradient calor HEEEEEE order color HFFFFFF Fill brightness Lightest Border width J px Gradient angle 0 Comer radius Inner margin Shadow strength On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin Managed tab block Sequence Use sound effects Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch cl
187. ects will be displayed Thus only text images and special objects located in Title Slide folder such as Start Module Button and Title Slide Popup should be used when editing the Title Slide Slide Transitions delays events and actions are not allowed too 4 How to Create Course The following topics describe the steps for creating eLearning Course e eLearning Course Scenario e New Course Wizard e Editing Module e Adding Modules e Adding Chapters and grouping Modules e Publish Course 4 1 eLearning Course Scenario The following should be taken under consideration while creating Learning Course Thematic Presentation of the Learning Course must be strictly consistent e Stay focused There is no need to pause do not follow the usual teaching approach of blending some funny story into the studying material Student himself will set the right pace to absorb the material e Do not provide too many alternatives A tree like Course structure is rather disadvantageous if compared to linear type Course It sends learners different directions therefore some parallel paths of the tree like structure are in jeopardy of not being revealed at all The only exception for using more complex structure is in case you need to provide an Example which is relevant to the Main Objective Note this example should be just an additional illustration to the learning material and could be skipped causing no damage to the overall learning process A
188. ed This is Rich Text field it can contain pictures tables links etc Scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Description Area size For each element you can define sound file with narration Display this tab selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Tab selected from the start and also displaying its preview in Edit mode In case no Tab is selected first Tab will be selected by default In case more than one Tab is selected first selected Tab will be active others will be ignored i Managed block Accordion Custom color Brightness Color scheme selected Custom color Fill brightness Border width MARI TI Co b all e 8 4 4 4 R Tab font Custom font Font size Font style Margin top bottom Margin left right Shadow strength S m EL E JEA H E 4 Select color schemes for idle and selected states one of predefined or custom You can also lighten or darken colors of selected color schemes Change Tab font settings Display controls ribbon Tithe t t Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Title font Custom fant Font style On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Custom color Fill brightness Border width Margin top bottom Margin left right Use custom fi
189. ed time e Appear after Defines delay of the object display start time relative to the Frame display Start time 6 2 3 Timeline Pane Besides explicitly specifying object s display time there is also an option possibility to use visual controls on the Timeline pane Select View gt Timeline to open Timeline panel On the top portion of the module s window Timeline panel opens up l4 CourseLab Test Moc Insert Title Format T Master Normal Slides Alt 1 Timeline Alt 3 Frames Alt 0 Course Task Pane On the panel there is a timetable containing all objects of the current Frame m oF alk x Os 15 et a Ts tial Ties TE Porctedoreedereetaerecedareadaree dered IMG _ Pad OBI_22 A TXT_6 The thin grey colored vertical line represents time limit for the Frame display end time In case Slide consists of several Frames at this particular time transition to the next Frame occurs Frame display time can be modified by dragging grey colored vertical line to the left or to the right along the time scale Stripe lines with object s identifiers in the Frame timing panel represent the time duration of the object display Left boundary of the stripe line represents object display start time Right boundary of the stripe line represents the time when object will disappear You can change object display start time and duration of the object display by
190. el properties dialog Use default color scheme for level Level color scheme Font Level elements Font size Font weight Font style Border width Back Interelement spacing px Gradient angle You can use one of predefined color schemes or select custom colors in this case color values from the right part of dialog will be used Use button to open level element dialog Hement ID EHement text Instruction text Sound file Cancel Element ID any unique for this object sequence of latin characters and numbers reserved for future use can be blank Element text short text on the arc inside the sector Font parameters from right part of the Level dialog will be applied to this text LIMITATION length of the text arc is quite small please keep this text as short as you can It cannot be distributed in few lines one line only Long texts will be cut Please use description for long texts Description any rich text description that will be displayed in special description block near the pyramid You can also attach sound file to each element swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects current element Preview description in editor checkbox allows to preview diagram with one of the description blocks displayed in edit mode if this checkmark is set on more than one sector only first description will be displayed Rings Chart Display backgroun
191. elayed Actions can be employed for the same purpose Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Object e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed un
192. ely related to the Object parameters Accordion tab block Tab comer are size from Oto 1 Description comer arc size from Oto 1 Border width Tab inner margin Intertab spacing None selected text On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order Tab text Description text Sound file Color scheme Normal MouseOver bret poce pece BUN eo e G r Fill color gradient a SFFFFFF ACCEE font car mee r E e G Gradient angle degrees o oo Use custom description fill color Background color For each element you can define Tab text short text for element Description text Rich Text field for full descrioption of the element Vertical scrolling will be added automatically and sound file which will be played on tab selection You can add sound file for each Tab Display this tab selected from the start makes current tab default tab If this checkbox is not checked at one of the tabs then None selected text will be displayed in description area at object display If checkbox is checked at more than one tab first checked tab becomes default others will be ignored Select one of the predefined color schemes or define custom colors for tab description blocks gradient angle for background and common display parameters corner arc sizes and spacings Other params include e tab height in pixels e corner radiu
193. emplates user can change Module s initial Template or add another Template to use it on some Slides To add new Template into current Module double click on suitable Template icon New Master Slide and Title Slide if confirmed will be added into Module m Templates can be customized by user using Customize link at the bottom of the Pane Decent me User can create own Templates and save them into My Templates section To mpo Media create Template user should create Module with one empty Slide change Master Minimal Slide and Title Slide according to design requirements and select menu command My Templates Tools gt Add module to templates Relief Rounded Tools Module Window Help simple Import from PowerPoint skew Screen capture Slant EE A es Recalc display times p Strict Compress images a G Customize Opi l Import data 3 What is eLearning Course eLearning Course encapsulates structured thematically self contained learning material which can be distributed to the learner throughout Internet or using memory devices Typically the eLearning Course accommodates self learning material but unlike book or manual provides the following e Powerful multimedia content Graphics animation and other rich media material audio and video in different formats Flash movie Java applications and others e Interaction presentation of the learning material may depend on the
194. empts incorect No more attempts Offset horizontal picela Offset vertical picels Hide messages automatically after Sec You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing Skin o Numeric text input field parameters Border style Solid Border width pixels oe Matching pairs parameters Match width pixels On the Display tab you can select basic appearance settings for the object Information messages Corect answer CORRECT ANSWER Last question state LAST QUESTION STATE QUESTION IS SKIPPED QUESTION IS SKIPPED AND FAILED Continued approach Starting from first unanswered There are unanswered questions Continue L ox cma J Hee Text fillan blank Pair match Attempts text Scored test text Not scored test text Question number text From text Question timer text Test timer text Stopped test text All Answered text No More Answered text On the Messages and Texts tabs you can edit the information and warning messages of the test Use default buttans Su
195. ened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back About Tab Display Parameters sound Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS _s Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise SOBJ_ID open 5 3 10 10 Next Slide Button Next Slide Button Object is a special object which enables transition to the next Slide from the current Slide In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLI
196. enerating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las tab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next tab if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Selects previous tab if applicable DISPLAY Selects tab that is selected in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _1D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax item Number of current opened tab starting from 1 SOBJ_ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all tabs have been visited 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 1 13 Guide Mark Guide Mark objects are used in conjunction with Guided Image object to mark image key points This object is visible in Edit mode only Examples of object appearance
197. ep the user focused and SO forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list Base weight of a question attempt base number of points for the question or attempt for regression method This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question If fixed crediting method is used the base weight of question equals the total score The following crediting methods can be used o Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight O Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regressi
198. er security settings blocks this connection add this address into exception list On the next screen fill in Product Key that was provided by your CourseLab supplier Product Key is character sequence from 19 to 25 symbols and press Next button If connection is not blocked and Product Key is correct then activation will be accomplished in few seconds and you can start using CourseLab If for some reason activation via Internet is not accomplished you get activation error messages press Back button and select Via E mail E Activation via E mail This activation method needs some manual procedures therefore it may take from few minutes to few days to accomplish it Activation procedure is an exchange of e mail messages containing files with a digital signature User sends files with digital signature of the HASP driver C2V customer to vendor reply contains digital signature of Licensing server V2C vendor to customer Fill in Product Key that was provided by your CourseLab supplier Product Key is character sequence from 19 to 25 symbols into correspondinf field Location field becomes active Select location where C2V file with activation request will be created and press Create file button Create this file and send it as attachment to your CourseLab supplier After you receive reply from your supplier with V2C file attached save this file on local disk proceed to the same Activation License Wizard screen
199. er to the question is correct Test Course First Slide Meow is the cry of Cat Cow Here is the sequence of the necessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object Event bi Action ondrop METHOD Object 0B _15 Method PerfomAction CALL urea CHECKHIT DELAY ondragout DISPLAY ondragover ELSE beforedisplay afterdisplay On Display Question On Change Choice IF SUCCESS STATUS On Attempt JAVASCRIPT On Success METHOD On Failure MOVE START MOVE STOP a MSGBOX On Attempts Limit NAVIGATION On Skip Question RETURN On Question Answered ROTATE START k ROTATE STOF lt m 2 Select On Success in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters Applaud and Return upon completion Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method RETURN TO IDLE M sai HIDE ZI TELEPORT EE METHOD Te Method Perfom ction Action Applaud Retum to idle state In the above example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching Action However any other Events or delayed Actions can be employed for the same purpose Object methods The following Methods can be u
200. esenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and SO forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type There are 3 options for this question type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Sum of variant weights sum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Max of variant weights maximal weight of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 3 Min of variant weights minimum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Avg of variant weights average of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Avg of all variant weights sum of all selected variant weights regarding full number of variants will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Weight of question attempt base for calculating score The following crediting methods can be used O
201. esirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Item Moved User moves any item on Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation on Success At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct on Failure At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect on Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined on Attempts Limit After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode tokens normal review SOBJ_ID questionMode questionType mt
202. essages for buttons Help Popup Window Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 ne Click sound Standard 1 s Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB3_ D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise SOBJ_ ID open 5 3 10 20 Contents Popup Window Contents Popup Window enables displaying current Module contents indicates visited Slides and allows navigation within a Module Object consists of two parts button to call the object and Contents Popup Window Only Contents button is visible in editing mode In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON TH
203. ethod or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns
204. etting Module objective Module translates results of completion of this objective to the Learning Management Systems as a result of completion for the entire Module By default it is named total and has predefined initial completion status incomplete it means that entire module will have completion status incomplete immediately after initial launch During Module execution the properties of the objectives change either by employing special actions or by employing actions built in into the complex objects for example Question objects record score into the defined objective by itself To add new objective 1 Select Module gt Runtime Settings ib Test Module t Tools Module Window Help g gd View Module F5 j 3 View Slide Shift F5 Update Objects Delete Unused Files Design Settings Alt F7 Runtime Settings 2 In the opened Runtime Settings dialog screen go to the Objectives tab 3 On the Objectives tab press Add button Module Properties General Objectives Rules Checks Objectives Identifier Max Score Min Score total 0 100 Properties E 4 Use Objective dialog screen to specify objective s settings Specify objective s identifier please use latin charachters and numbers only objective s description plain text if needed initial completion and success statuses and scores There must be
205. ew Slide the viewing mode Am Actions Comments The Learning Module may contain several Master Slides By Default in the process of building a Module every newly created Slide is linked to the first Master Slide from the list Cut regardless of number of Master Slides for this Module Copy g Paste You can modify Master Slide which is the foundation for a a4 associated Slide while in editing mode Right click on the Slide from the Slide Panel and select Master Slide option from the context menu In the pop up window make a selection of Rename desired Identifier from the list of Master Slides Identifier Advance New Slide Delete Slide Note that every newly created Slide is based on the Master Slide which is associated with the previous Slide For example the foundation for new Slide 11 will be the Master Slide of Slide Hm Actions Comments 4 3 3 3 Slide Content To insert pictures texts and objects into the Frame of the Slide Insert gt Picture Insert gt Text Box and Insert gt Object sub menus can be used or corresponding toolbar buttons Complex objects can be inserted directly from the Object Library either by double clicking on the selected objects or by dragging and dropping the object into the working area Course Ste tet Yew poet forms Jocis Modde window help Jx J h Aaa E AM gt 100 gt b amp b Lb BI View Modete Test Course Slide Name
206. f action token short names SOBJ_ D lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ID queue 5 3 11 6 Talking Head different psychotypes The Talking Head is an animated character with a set of basic Actions these Actions can be launched using Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Cholerics Melancholics Phlegmatics Object parameters Talking Head different psycho types PFN Parameters Character Melancholic female Display mode Transparent layer The Talking Head is actually a Flash movie so its appearance and display parameters can be manipulated in a similar manner In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture the situation when we have both a question and a Talking Head c
207. f display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Multiple Group Matching Use custom timer colors Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Multiple Group Matching Use custom buttons Button type Sam oro Ske question oe Button size width px height pot MouseOver Hips Border width 2 px m aoon pa ra jaia wawa es e 12 px 12 px ox caca sy J Hee Multiple Group Matching QUESTION IS SKIPPED AND FAILED Tooltip on Detach match Click on the slot to detach Continued approach Number of attempt This question is already answered Rec This question is already answered Pres Skipped question will be treated failed No more empty slots in this group This match is aready attached to this gr Multiple Group Matching Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to und
208. f the Learning Course e Opened Module s window is located in the middle of the CourseLab window e Task Pane is located in the right portion of the CourseLab window 2 1 Course Pane Course Pane contains the heading of the Learning Course The same heading will be displayed for the learner in the Learning Management System To open or close Course Pane select menu option View gt Course View Inset Format a Splash w Master Normal Slides Alt 1 Timeline Alt 2 Frames Alt 3 Course Alt 0 Task Pane b Course Pane is located in the left portion of the CourseLab window Course x a Course MyCourse 5 modules iS Module Chapter 1 ci Module 1 1 H gt Module 1 2 ch apter 2 Module 2 1 Module 2 2 The heading consists of e Course name e names of the Chapters e names of the Modules Chapters can be grouped within another Chapters resulting in complicated Course hierarchy structure Double click on the name of the Module to open Module for editing To move Module or Chapter into the different Chapter drag and drop name of the Module into the target Chapter s name To modify the sequence of the Modules and Chapters use mouse to drag heading component into the parent s element of the heading By doing so the dragged element will be moved to the end of the list 2 2 Module window Opened Module s window is located in the middle of the CourseLab window Module win
209. format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example sOBJ_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Example of object appearance Here goes window text Here goes window text Here goes window text Object parameters Relief Popup Window Color scheme Lightblue st Header text e er Window text scene Si Inner margin pox Display popup close button F Close window on mouse click Select color scheme for the object The Base color refers to the color of the window title and border The background color for the part of the window containing the main text is usually white Input text for the header and the main part of the window By default title text is centered and has a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module You can change these settings while in editing mode Specify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block Define window closing rule it can be closed by clicking on pop up window Close button which looks similar to conventional Windows Close button or by clicking any
210. freshed on Text Added After text is added on Close Right after the moment when user clicks on Popup Close Button or on the Object window if Hide window on mouse click is checked Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result CLOSE TAB Closes the object REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 6 Balloons 5 3 6 1 Simple Balloon Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide In general amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small smaller than the instructions used for the similar Pop up window types of objects Balloon object is intended to open up when the user s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user s mouse moves away from the active area Therefore Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism Compared to Pop up window type of object Balloon objects can have pointer arrow Example of object appearance some explanation on TRIGGER TEXT This is the TRIGGER TEXT for balloon Object parameters simple Balloon Parameters Border color Steel Blue Arow Balloon text Balloon inner margin pieels Cancel Apph Help Select border color with respect to
211. g scoring type must be selected True False Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations scoring Feedback Display Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recurring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Cancel Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts for this type of question is always 1 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches True False Question Button Texts Sound Limitations Seong Feedback Display Question Scoring type Question weight Question objectives Objective tota
212. gin pixels Select color scheme background border color with respect to the overall design of the Slide Press Apply button to observe changes Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text If necessary specify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between balloon border and the text After you done with parameters settings place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area Usually Balloon should open up when the user s mouse moves over that link or active area Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define onMouseOver and onMouseOut actions enabling display of Balloon 5 3 6 3 Convex Balloon Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide In general amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small smaller than the instructions used for the similar Pop up window types of objects Balloon object is intended to open up when the user s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user s mouse moves away from the active area Therefore Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism Compared to Pop up window type of object Balloon objects can have pointer arrow some explanation on TRIGGER TEXT This is the TRIGGER TEXT for balloon Object parameters Convex Balloon Parameters Balloon
213. greson atten var1 lt var2 10 Simple boolean expression for IF action var1 gt 5 amp amp var2 gt 10 Complex boolean expression for IF action var3 cancel var1 var2 100 Numeric expression for defining action parameter numeric value arythmentic var1 is correct String expression for defining action parameter string value concatenating strings 9 Scoring Scores and statuses in Learning Modules created with CourseLab are based on using objectives and rules 9 1 Objectives Objective is a special parameter for evaluating of Learning Module completion and success There might be one or several objectives in the single Module Technically there is no limitation on number of learning objectives however such limitations can be introduced when using certain International standards of data transfer protocols for example in SCORM the number of objectives cannot exceed 100 Each objective has a Score Success Status and Completion Status Success Status can have one of the following values e Unknown e Failed objective is not accomplished e Passed objective is accomplished Competion Status can have one of the following values e Unknown e Not Attempted completion of the objective is not started yet e Incomplete completion of the objective is started but it is not finished yet e Complete completion of the objective is finished One of the objectives for the Module must have defined s
214. gth of the entry field in symbols We recommend allowing some extra space for that purpose For example if desired answer is 3 224 then the field size is 5 symbols including decimal point We recommend using double size of the desired length 4 symbols in this example so that user does not get a hint about the correct answer If necessary enter description message for the answer field Description message appears to the left of the answer field and may contain for example units of measure for the answer Specify conditions for the correct answer Use menu button to add conditions to the list of conditions menu as many as needed In the opened sub dialog screen fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer In the simple case only single condition is used for example when entered answer must exactly match some number In case you need to specify the interval of numbers for example when the answer should be the number in the range of 7 to 8 you should specify two conditions a greater than 7 b less than 8 Therefore any number in the range of 7 to 8 excluding 7 and 8 otherwise different conditions should be used greater or equal to 7 AND less or equal to 8 will be treated as correct answer IMPORTANT When user s response is checked there is no difference whether comma or dot symbols are used as a decimal separator However for specifying the correct answer in CourseLab editor it is recommended to use decimal POINT
215. h in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin Managed controls block Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las tab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next tab if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Selects previous tab if applicable DISPLAY Selects tab that is selected in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specifi
216. h Tab Display Search Texts Styles 2ound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open O otherwise SOBJ_ID open 5 3 10 9 About Tab About Tab object enables displaying the information text block for the Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance MS First Slide Test Course About This eLearning Module was developed using CourseLab eLearning Content Editor Depending on purpose this Module can be used in any AICC or SCORM compatibl
217. haracter presented in a Slide The Talking Head s task is to be amazed when the provided response to the question is incorrect Test Course First Slide Meow is the cry of Cat Cow Dog Here is the sequence of the necessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object Event Ibje Action ondrop METHOD Object 0BJ_ 17 Method Perom Action CALL i CHECKHIT EFENA DELAY ondragout DISPLAY ondragover ELSE beforedisplay EXTERNAL URL afterdisplay FOR On Display Question GOTO On Change Choice IF SUCCESS STATUS On Attempt 4 JAVASCRIPT On Success METHOD om MOVE STOP papas MSGBOX pipes E NAVIGATION On Skip Question RETURN On Question Answered ROTATE START ROTATE STOP IF 2 Select On Failure in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters Amazement and Return upon completion Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method Z ACTION TELEPORT EE METHOD Object Method Fefom ction Action Amazement ka In the above example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching Action However any other Events or delayed Actions can be employed for the same purpo
218. he Frame Transparent by default click area can be made visible and blinking using object methods This may be useful for example to highlight click area in case of incorrect click The object is invisible by default therefore object s placeholder is displayed in Edit mode After inserting object into the Frame adjust object s size and position in relation to the Frame structure Open Properties dialog screen Click Area Highlighting Opacity level percents Background color FF9900 I eaa 2 _ Preview highlighted Cancel On the Highlighting tab you can select blinking timer background color border parameters and Opacity of the object in the Highlight mode Check the Preview highlighted checkmark to preview object s Highlight mode Be aware that there s no possibility to display transparency for this object in CourseLab Edit mode therefore only background and border can be previewed Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result HIGHLIGHT ON Turns the object in the Highlight mode HIGHLIGHT OFF Turns the object back to Invisible mode 5 3 7 3 Active Zone The Active Zone type of Object is used to control mouse click on any part of the Frame and to launch different actions on correct and incorrect clicks Transparent by default a click area can be made visible using Object Methods This may be useful for example to highlight the cl
219. he identifier of the object which movement needs to be cancelled In case movement of all objects need to be cancelled this parameter is ignored and it may be left blank All_ Objects Token Possible values Value Description Yes Movements of all currently moving objects will be cancelled input value for Object parameter will be ignored No Movement of the Object specified in the Object parameter will be cancelled 8 2 8 IF IF conditional action Conditional action does not perform any noticeable changes to the Frame it is rather intended for managing the execution of other actions Enables launching of different dependant actions or sequences of actions with regards to the condition being evaluated You can use ELSEaction to form alternative action sequence i e when condition is not met IF edit Condition Parameters Condition Boolean expression Condition can contain CourseLab variable value as var_name where var_name is variable name please refer to VARIABLE section for additional information or object s property value as SOB ID property where OBJ_ID is actual object ID and property is existing object s property name please refer to Object Properties section for additional information or expressions Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by IF action must be indented at one position from IF See also Using Expressions in Actions for more details 8 2 9 IF COMPLETION STATUS IF COMPL
220. he player is playing media Use it with currentPosition property to create time binded actions on Change Play Fires at the moment when playing state of the media is changed state itself doesn t matter just State changed on Play Stopped At the moment when playing of media stops no matter was it learner s click or the end of media on Play Started At the moment when playing of media starts position doesn t matter on End Of Media At the moment when playing of media stops on the end of media on Position Fires when current position is changed by slider control or method Changed Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result PLAY Start playing clip STOP Stops playing clip REWIND Rewinds clip to the beginning does not change playing state PAUSE Pauses playing Use PLAY method to continue from paused CONTINUE Start playing clip from current position SET VOLUME Sets sound volume integer 0 100 MUTE Mutes sound UNMUTE Unmutes sound SET POSITION Sets playing position in seconds does not change playing state May not work with FLV 1 0 files Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID IMPORTANT Most of properties and events of this object are not native to Flash Video or Flash they are simulated by soft
221. hen we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties A
222. his object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax currentPosition Returns number of current Slide SOBJ ID currentPosition 5 3 10 4 Contents Tab Contents tab enables displaying the list of the Slides within Module and transition to other Slides by selecting their names unless transition to selected Slide is in agreements with other conditions In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance MS First Slide Test Course Contents gt First Slide jean Second Slide Second Slide Explanation Select ci Object parameters Contents Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab Onttousel ver tab Disabled tab OnClick Tab Border color horizontal Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip In case the default tab is used you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color Contents Tab Parameters Sound Header text Us
223. hod by default window title will NOT be changed LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance W Module name Slide name Note that this object is virtual hidden therefore you can see such placeholder in editor Object parameters Window Title Parameters Display window title Title contains Module chapter slide Module name Madle name Divider E Select title contents Module name which usually is in Course structure pane can be redefined for title because window title is usually limited in length so it is better to use shorter variant here Note that chapter name is available only if Alternative Path object is defined for this module 5 3 10 14 Sound On Off Button Sound On Off Button object is a special object which enables turning on and off the audio feature of the Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance x Object parameters Sound Button Parameters Sound Use default button set On button tooltip Sound is on Tum sound off Off button tooltip Sound is of Tum sound on Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures beco
224. hould be created New Course Name and location of new course Provide course name and folder location where course will be created Mame My Course Folder Course l Location Course will be created at C Courses Course 1 The Course is created with the single Module by default On the next page of the Master insert name of the first Module and Select Module template Later on you may add more modules to the Course as well as Chapters New Course Arst module Provide module name and select design template Module Name Standard Course is created Click Close button to finish working on the New Course Wizard New Course Course successfully created and ready to use A e a v MD r et O Version 2 4 4 3 Editing Module Editing module include following tasks e Editing Title Slide e Editing Master Slide e Editing Slides e Preview Module e Adding Slides 4 3 1 Editing Title Slide To turn On Title Slide editing mode use View gt Title Slide sub menu or quick switching button in the Slide s Panel 4 CourseLab Test Mo Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Title Alt 0 You may change picture Logo insert Module name and Instructions prior to presenting Module and so on If necessary you can modify the look of Start button Start button can be displayed in two ways Inactive displayed from the moment system starts loading the Module up until Module is loaded and Active di
225. ht of question attempt Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed O regressive Question objectives d Eg Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and so forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Sum of variant weights sum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Max of variant weights maximal weight of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Min of variant weights minimum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only o Avg of variant
226. i e ZIP archive with course files and SCORM metadata files The course that is published using this option can be imported and used in any LMS that supports SCORM 2004 standard Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Publish course files to Run from CD Run under SCORM 1 2 LMS Run under AICC LMS Note that the course published for using in SCORM 2004 environment will support this standard only As a result of publication you will get the ZIP archive that contains all course runtime files and course metadata files In most cases you do not need to unzip the archive most of LMS can accept ZIP archive for importing If your LMS cannot import zipped package unzip the archive in specified folder and use imsmanifest xml file on the top level of folder to import course structure S VSK_SCORM_ 004 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back a pa Search Wey Folders Address 0 C CoursesWSKWSK_SCORM_2004 Name Size Type CD wsk_o01 zip 22512KB WinZip File i My Computer 4 6 8 Uploading into CourseLab TeamWork This method is used to transfer working copy of the Course into CourseLab TeamWork system to allow simultaneous editing by team Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Publish course files to Run from Run under SCORM 1 2 LMS Run under SCORM 2004 LM5 LIMITATION CourseLab application version must be supported by CourseLab Tea
227. ick area if of an incorrect click The object is invisible by default therefore object s placeholder is displayed in Edit mode WARNING This Object captures ALL mouse clicks in selected control area therefore all clickable objects links buttons Objects with actions etc located under control area will not accept clicks while this Object is active This Object evaluates mouse clicks on all Frame Therefore no more than one Object of such type can be used in active mode simultaneously To activate deactivate this Object use Object s special methods ACTIVATE AREA DEACTIVATE AREA Once involved this object cannot be hidden as easy as any other Object due to its special abilities To switch off this Object completely use Object s special method DESTROY AREA After inserting this Object into a Frame adjust the Object s size and position in relation to the Frame structure Open the Properties dialog screen The mouse click on the defined Active zone is always considered as correct There are 3 modes of incorrect mouse click control Whole Frame Selected Object or Selected Area depending on area to control incorrect click Active Zone Ed Active Zone Click control zone Selected object 4 Object to control r S o po po Cancel Cancel 1 Whole Frame mode mouse click anywhere on the Frame except for Active zone will be considered as incorrect 2 Selected Object mode mouse c
228. ick and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las tab is selected on All Items Displayed When last unvisited tab is selected Note that this event fires only once Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result NEXT ITEM Selects next tab if applicable PREVIOUS ITEM Selects previous tab if applicable DISPLAY Selects tab that is selected in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax group Current group number starting from 1 SOBJ_ID group item Current tab number inside the group starting from 1 S
229. ified using methods Method name Execution Result CLOSE Closes the object RESIZE Changes the size of the object Note that top left corner position of the object is fixed REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 13 3 Simple Text Box Simple Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with optional border and different scrolling settings Compared to embedded regular text box this Text Box enables using scrolling and special effects for text occurrence Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example soBs_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Example of object appearance The MCE made a regulation under the National Electricity Law that extends the time to make Rules governing the regulation of electricity transmission revenue and p
230. ill ALWAYS be displayed in random order Number of displayes slots on the base restricts maximal number of matches that can be attached to base It can be O no restriction there will be no match slots on the bases exact number of matches for this group in fact this is the hint for user maximal number of matches i e from group with maximal number of matches and custom Note that if the number of displayed slots is not 0 then user will see the warning No more slots message when trying to attach more matches than defined by this value Matching Groups Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Number of attempts _ Limit time for the answer Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recurring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Help Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 a
231. imer is stopped SOBJ_ID state value Current timer value integer in seconds SOBJ_ID value 5 3 10 28 Comments object Comments object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide that defined by the author or imported from PowerPoint Object default parameters are optimized for Import templates intended for importing PowerPoint presentations but this is not limitation object can be used on any other template LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance ili Section 35 of the National Electricity Law MEL requires the Australian Energy Market Commission AEMC to amend the National Electricity Rules WER governing economic regulation of electricity transmission revenue and prices on or before 1 July 2006 ora later date thatis prescribed under a Regulation made under the MEL The MCE made a regulation under the National Electricity Law that extends the time to make Rules governing the regulation of electricity transmission revenue and prices to 1 January 2007 This extension to the deadline enabled the Commission to consider the economic regulation of transmission services in broadly two streams revenue and pricing COMMENTS Object parameters Slide Comments Use default comments tab Window size horiz px vet px Default tab color Yellow Window background color Tab tooltip Comments No comments message No comments Hide objec
232. in Edit mode note Guide Marks on the Image Cat OG Testing indicates that a cat s vision ts greaterat night in comparison to humans and inferior in daylight citation needed Cats like dogs and many other animals have a tapetum lucidum which is a reflective layer behind the retina that sends light that passes through the retina back into the eye 1 While this improves the ab ity to see in darkness it appears to reduce net visual acuity thus detracting when light is abundant In very bright light the siit tke iris doses very narrowly over the eye reducing the amount of light on the sensitive retina and improving depth of field Big cats have pupils that contract to a round point The tapetum and other mechanisms give the cat a minimum light detection threshold up to seven times lower than that of humans Variation in color of cats eyes in flash photographs is largely due to the reflection of the flash by the tapetum Object parameters The only Object parameter is color you can change it in contrast to Image colors 5 3 1 14 Guided Image Guided Image object is used to display Image with descriptions to Image s key points This Object needs Guide Mark Objects to mark Image s key points This type of Object its own Controls ribbon with Next Previous buttons Examples of object appearance in Edit mode note Guide Marks on the Image Cat OG Testing indicates that a cat s vision ts greater a
233. inate but automatically adjust the size by Y coordinate ignoring H parameter of this action SIZE START objectid Object edit W edit H select Additive time Duration Parameters Object String Identifier of the object which will be resized W Number or expression must have numeric value Defines width change of the object depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute i e define new width of the object or relative to the current width Number or expression must have numeric value Defines height change of the object depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute i e define new height of the object or relative to the current height Additive Token Possible values Value Description Replace Specified w and H parameters define new width of the object absolute values Add Specified w and H parameters will be added to the current width and height of the object i e the object will be resized with regards to added coordinates relative to the object s current size Duration Number Defines time in seconds of object resize Zero value corresponds to instant object relocation 8 2 28 SIZE STOP SIZE STOP action interrupts resizing of the selected object or all currently resized objects SIZE STOP objectid Object select A _ Objects Parameters Object String The identifier of the object which resize needs to be cancelled In case resize of all ob
234. ine messages and tooltips that will be presented to learner Search Popup Window Styles tab contains style parameters for presenting search form and results Search Popup Window Window Button search Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise SOBJ_ ID open 5 3 10 22 Glossary Popup Window Glossary Popup Window is used to display systematic glossary of terms with descriptions Object consists of two parts button to call the object and Glossary Popup Window Only Glossary button is visible in editing mode LIMITATION This Object can
235. into the Frame specify URL which you are going to open Remove checkmark in case you prefer not to use standard icon After Display Icon field becomes active select desired image file will be copied into the images folder of learning Module Select size for the browser window to be opened and other settings as appropriate 5 3 3 3 IFRAME IFRAME object is used for opening an external web content from file or distant server into the area on the Frame WARNING This object must be placed on top of ALL other objects on the Frame otherwise errors may arise due to specific nature of this HTML Element NOTE This object is capable to load content from other domains therefore browser s security restrictions i e cross domain security may apply to this object There s no possibility to override browser security settings from content Example of IFRAME appearance in Edit area External URL http va0e courselab com gt The same IFRAME in Runtime mode A Products Shov Course CourseLab Features List Applications Rapid Development Supported formats Testing Capabilities E Learning Standards Object parameters IFRAME for external URL Parameters IFRAME source URL http www courselab com Scrolling Automatic Border sye Border color Border width pixels After inserting object into the Frame specify UR
236. ion Name and location of SCORM package Provide SCORM package name and folder location where SCORM package will be created Name C Courses Published SCORM package will be created at C Courses Published Test0 1 Click Next button and wait while your course is published Course is published and saved in given location Course Publication The course is successfully published A O Vi MD r O O Version 2 4 4 6 4 Publication for CD This publication option is used to create the course for CD DVD or any other local storage type or for demonstration purposes The course that is published using this option is not intended to support any e learning standard therefore it will not send any data to LMS Course Publication Publication type Select publication type Run under SCORM 1 2 LM5 Run under SCORM 2004 LMS Run under AICC LMS Note that while the course does not send any data it is treated by browser as active content anyway therefore it can be the subject for browser security settings Playing of active content from local computer and removable drives is not allowed by default in some browsers As a result of publication you will get the folder with full uncompressed course structure excluding design time information and small simple file qutorun htm on the top level see example on the picture This file contains links to all course modules but
237. ion comer are size from Oto 1 Border width Button inner margin Interbutton spacing Button description spacing None selected text On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order _ Display this button selected from the start Description text Sound file Color scheme MouseOver prc one e meer O cone a came Coma arg D err O er Font color Gradient angle degrees _ Use custom description fill color Cancel For each element you can define Tab text short text for element Description text Rich Text field for full descrioption of the element Vertical scrolling will be added automatically and sound file which will be played on tab selection You can add sound file for each Tab Display this tab selected from the start makes current tab default tab If this checkbox is not checked at one of the tabs then None selected text will be displayed in description area at object display If checkbox is checked at more than one tab first checked tab becomes default others will be ignored Select one of the predefined color schemes or define custom colors for tab description blocks gradient angle for background and common display parameters corner arc sizes and spacings Other params include e tab height in percent e corner radius in pixels or relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width
238. ion using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent Picture a situation when we have both a question and an Agent character presented in a Slide The Agent s task is to applaud when the provided answer to the question is correct Test Course First Slide io Meow is the cry of Here is the sequence of the necessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object Event i ondrop METHOD Object 0BJ_15 Method PerfomAction ondragin ondragout ondragover beforedisplay atterdisplay On Display Question On Change Choice On Attempt On Success On Failure On Time Out On Attempts Limit On Skip Question On Question Answered F 2 Select On Success in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel CALL CHECKHIT DELAY DISPLAY ELSE EXTERNAL URL FOR GOTO IF IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP MSGBOX NAVIGATION RETURN ROTATE START ROTATE STOP 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters Applaud and Return upon completio
239. ional standards for utilizing and exchanging learning content The complete comprehensive eLearning course can be created using CourseLab application When Course is ready author starts publication process The result of publication is ZIP package which is structured according to selected e Learning standard s Content Aggregation Model CAM This package contains all necessary course files and special metadata files which contain information on Course structure Course package is imported into standard compliant LMS using built in import procedures When learner studies course course communicates with LMS using corresponding e Learning standard s Run Time Environment RTE Course stores its state in LMS storage and restores state on continued approaches 2 Interface This is what the CourseLab window looks like upon finishing New Course Wizard 20061004 CourseLab Test Module S file Edit View jnsert Format Tools Module Window Help a al i 2 ro 100 vile 3I View Module ii ee Bh Course x Course 20061004 Module i E module 2 Ca Test Module Slide Name Meow is the cr Cat Cow J LATOR Dog CALCU Sheep Queston time imt E SETTINGS O ee gt Slide 1 of 5 CourseLab window is divided into the panels each of which is used for completion different tasks e Course Pane is located in the left portion of the CoursLab window Course Pane contains the heading o
240. is type of Object its own Controls ribbon with Next Previous buttons Example of object appearance Controversial radio DJ Howard Stern is to replace Piers Morganon the judging panel of America s Got Talent it has been announced Stern 57 who presents a daily radio show on Sirus XM will join Howie Mandel and Sharon Osbourne on the tearm The star has vowed to give honest opinions and said it was likely that feelings are going to be hurt An original shock jock Stern has often been in trouble for off colour In 2004 he was dropped by media giant Clear Channel after it was fined for indecency Despite his sometimes offensive and often sexual language the DJ says he does not deliberately set out to cause controversy Object parameters On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state m PELELELEETETTELLELEELEELELELETEEELELELELLEELELELLLEETLELELLETETTELLELEEETEELLETEEETTEELELI C Display this tab selected from the start Tab tet Howard Stem Description text Controversial radio DJ Howard Stem is to rep TE Sound file Tab text short text that will be displayed on the Tab Description full text that will be displayed in Description Area of the Object when corresponding Tab is selected This is Rich Text field it can co
241. is case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective 4 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Matching Pairs Question Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display F Display corect answer Prev Corect answer F incorect answer Incorrect F No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal pa Ofset vertical pot Feedback box width px _ Hide feedback automatically Backgroun Border Button om ore Emm fms G ren ren C roms oreo jaro ren roms ore Tsou
242. it or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Text Fill In Blank Question Use custom timer colors Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color sa On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Text Fill In Blank Question 120 aha z4 a MouseOver z es mn eG m 12 P 12 P __ok_ Cancel J ay Hep Text Fill In Blank Question This question is already answered Rec This question is already answered Pres Skipped question will be treated failed ok _ Cancel toy J Hee Text Fill In Blank Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Failure sound Success sound Standard 1 On the Sound tab you c
243. ith no correct answer only Min of variant weights minimum of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Avg of variant weights average of all selected variant weights will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only Avg of all variant weights sum of all selected variant weights regarding full number of variants will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Weight of question attempt base for calculating score 3 The following crediting methods can be used O Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective 4 Possibility to Skip the question In case thi
244. jects Horizontal Alignment l Align Left Align the selected objects horizontally relative to the border of the left most object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Align Center Selected objects are centered horizontally relative to the centerline of the widest object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Align Right Align the selected objects horizontally relative to the border of the right most object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Vertical Alignment qt Align Top Align the selected objects vertically relative to the border of the top most object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Align Middle Selected objects are centered vertically relative to the centerline of the highest object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar ilt Align Bottom Selected objects are vertically aligned relative to the border of the lowest object from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Commands available for three or more selected objects Horizontal distribution of the objects He Distribute Horizontally Selected objects are horizontally equally distributed between the outermost objects from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar Distribute Vertically Distribute Vertica
245. jects need to be cancelled this parameter is ignored and it may be left blank All_ Objects Token Possible values Value Description Yes Resize of all currently resized objects will be cancelled input value for Object parameter will be ignored No Resize of the Object specified in the Object parameter will be cancelled 8 2 29 TIMER TIMER action is used for delayed launching of dependant actions TIMER edit Duration Parameters Duration Number Value of timer delay in seconds Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by TIMER action must be indented at one position from TIMER 8 2 30 SET SUCCESS STATUS SET SUCCESS STATUS action changes Success Status for the specified objective SET SUCCESS STATUS objectiveid Objective select Status Parameters Objective String The identifier of the objective Success Status of which will be changed Status Token Represents the value to be assigned to selected objective s Success Status Value Description Unknown No information on status Failed Success Status of selected objective has value Failed Succeeded Success Status of selected objective has value Passed 8 2 31 FOR FOR action is used for executing dependant actions specified number of times FOR edit Name edit From edit To edit Step select Scope Parameters Name String Cycle counter variable name From Number or expression must have numeric value Starting value for the cycl
246. ker is unchecked then you can use custom images for displaying tabs change comments window size change object s border color If there is no comment to current slide then No comments text will be displayed Slide Comments Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click w Mouseover sound Standard 1 s Sound file Click sound Sound file On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 11 Agents 5 3 11 1 Agent An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Object parameters Parameters Agent Display mode Transparent layer You can specify an Agent s appearance and display parameters similar to Flash movie display settings in fact an Agent is a Flash movie In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player vers
247. l Display maximum score pane Weight for each objective must be set Weight of each variant must be set Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and so forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type There are 3 options for this question type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Variant weight in case of correct answer weight of variant will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Weight of question attempt base for calculating score 3 Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for
248. l selected objects If you leave the field empty angle of rotation will remain unchanged for each object By doing so you can specify value for the angle of rotation for several objects IMPORTANT The Browser s capabilities are used for Object rotating when displaying the learning Module Due to some Browser limitations the quality of the rotated Object can be affected LIMITATION An Objects rotation is supported only by Internet Explorer Browsers rotation is not supported by other Browsers 6 1 7 Changing Objects Z Order Objects within a Slide appear sequentially It is very illustrative in case objects are positioned using cascading see picture below The newly created objects displayed first therefore they are covered by objects which have been created later Slide Name CALCULATOR INGS To modify the sequence of the objects Z Order use the following commands 41 Bring to Front command is available from the context menu Order gt Bring to Front or by pressing corresponding button in the toolbar 24 Send to Back command is available from the context menu Order gt Send to Back or by pressing corresponding button in the toolbar Lh Bring Forward command is available from the context menu Order gt Bring Forward or by pressing corresponding button in the toolbar La Send Backward command is available from the context menu Order gt Send Backward Or by pressing corresponding button in the toolbar
249. lates Y X Clouds Comer Decent Empty Import Media Minimal My Templates Raised Relief Rounded Simple Slant Squared Standard Strict Customize 2 3 1 Frame structure Frame structh Task Pane in the Frame Structure mode displays current Frame ID and list of all FRAMES a Objects also Groups and Scenarios that are used on the Frame Objects within a Frame appear sequentially The newly created objects displayed first therefore F ii they are covered by objects which have been created later C Groups scenarios Each Object area has Object ID and small icons that depicts additional Object s parameters Object has Actions attached to its Events Object displays with delay SI Object is not displayed at all is Object has transition on display amp Object has sound file attached 2 3 2 Object Library Task Pane in the Frame Structure mode displays all Objects that available for Balloons creating Course Objects are grouped by their purpose Design me There are two way to insert the Object on the Frame drag the Object s icon on the Lists Frame or double click on its icon in this case Object will be inserted exactly in the na center of the Frame Navigation Popup Questions Objects can be customized by user using Customize link at the bottom of the Pane W Tests Textboxes Title Slide Visualization 2p ca Customize 2 3 3 Clip Art
250. le object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance First Slide z Object parameters Navigation Menu Background color Font Font size Font weight Font style Font color a Display slides hierarchy Strict Navigation mode Strict slide order message You cannot jump to this slid F atemative module structure is defined in Module Structure object this object will use this structure automatically Cancel You can modify different Navigation menu display settings The marker Show Slide hierarchy enables to modify display mode of the Slide s structure in the Module Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the frame were played back Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run time settings Navigation Menu Use sound effects Change selection sound Standard 1 Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object
251. lick anywhere on the Object except for Active zone will be considered as incorrect Mouse clicks outside the Object are not evaluated at all 3 Selected Area mode mouse click anywhere on the area on the Frame that is defined by coordinates except for Active zone will be considered as incorrect Mouse clicks outside this area are not evaluated at all Active Zone Attempts allowed On attempt On last attempt The number of attempts allowed can be defined on the Incorrect tab Each attempt can have its own lists of Objects to display and to hide Besides highlighting of Active zone could be used after last incorrect attempt Attempt number Display objects The lists of Objects to display and to hide in case of correct attempt can be defined on Correct tab Active Zone Display objects Parameters of highlighting can be defined on Highlight tab Active Zone Border style Border color order width Preview highlighting in editor LIMITATION Opacity cannot be applied in preview mode Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLa
252. ll color Fill color HFFFFFF a Gime Gai Gated On Descriptions tab you can change display parameters for Description Area Display background ACCCCOE HEEEEEFE HFFFFFF Lightest 2 pa 0 deg 10 px Inner margin 12 px Shadow ser On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin Managed tab block Accordion Use sound effects Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed On every tab selection on First Item Displayed When first tab is selected on Last Item Displayed When las t
253. lly Selected objects are vertically equally distributed between the outermost objects from the selection Command is available by pressing button on the toolbar 6 1 6 Rotating Objects Rotating objects using mouse 1 Place cursor over rotation marker 2 Press left mouse button 3 Hold the mouse button down and then drag the cursor to the desired location in the Slide Dotted frame which is moving along with cursor indicates new location of the object s placeholder 4 Release the mouse button To interrupt rotation of the object press Esc key It is also possible to rotate several objects at once Allocation of selected objects in relationship to each other will remain unchanged To specify precise value for the angle of object s rotation 1 Select desired object 2 Open Format dialog window by specifying Format Object command which is available either by selecting Format menu item from the context menu or by pressing button in the toolbar 3 Transfer to the Size page on the dialog window 4 Specify desired object s angle of rotation by supplying new value for the Rotation field Format Colors and Lines Size Display Sound Size and rotate Width Height Rotation ge Cancel You can also use Format window to specify angle of rotation for several selected objects When Format dialog window is opened the Rotation field will be populated with the value only if this value is identical for al
254. long with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ D queue 5 3 11 9 Hare An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Object parameters fe yneTca oToSpasuTe caasaHHH DrcyHoK Basmoxoo ror a n Buin nepeneuten nepevmerosan couma yraaunaer na npani In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are
255. m SOBJ_ID questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined SOBJ_ D questionDuration questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined SOBJ_ID questionTimer itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity SOBJ_ D itemQuantity attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts left SOBJ_ D attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal 5 3 5 Popup Such objects as Pop up windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the Slide Basically text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the similar Balloon type of objects Therefore Pop up window can be activated by clicking on the link or button It does not close automatically it remains open Compared to Balloon type of object Pop up window type has it s own windows closing mechanism 5 3 5 1 Standard Popup Window Such objects as Pop up windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the Slide Basically text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the similar Balloon type of objects Therefore Pop up window can be activated by clicking on the link or button It does not close automatically it remains open Compared to Balloon type of object Pop up window type has it s own windows closing mechanism Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions ca
256. m text Inner margin pixels Vertical align Otop mid bottom Select item background color and border color of item with respect to the overall design Select marker type for the list Item Input text for the list item Specify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block 5 3 12 7 Animated List Animated Listucnonb3yetca O6bINHO AVIA CO3AAHNA CNUCKOB YTBEPKACHUN NOABNAIOLUMXCA NO oyepegn Comep KuT BCTDOeHHbIe MeXaHU3MbI ynpaBneHnem MOKa3a 3 IEMEHTOB IMPORTANT Since this object contains built in display mechanisms the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame Example of object appearance V Default text V Default text V Default text Object parameters ee Symbol color Hements list Tert Default t t Default text Checkmark Default text Checkmark Transition Duration Direction Delay time Display shadow Select main element color and marker color according to your design requirements Select transition effects This Object can use additional Zoom in and Fly in effects m Tak Default text Smbat Select marker type Fill elements text Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other o
257. mWork for successful import On the next Wizard screen fill in CourseLab TeamWork server address and user login and password Course Publication Web Tutor connection parameters 4l A Please enter Web Tutor server address and account data Account must have a A privileges to upload courses WebTutor server address DNS Host IF http teamwork mycompany com Login myaccount Password PrILiiiii IMPORTANT User must have privileges to place courses into CourseLab TeamWork system Press Next button if all connection parameters are correct and Internet connection is present Course will be uploaded into selected CourseLab TeamWork system 4 7 Export Course Outline Sometimes it may be useful to get outline of the Course for demonstration or discussion purposes Export Course Outline is creating screenshots for each Slide of the Course To launch Export Course Outline process select menu File gt Export Course Outline Edit View Insert Format Tools E Open Ctrl 0 Clase cg Save Ctrl 5 Save all Ctrl Shift Course runtime settings Publish course Recent courses Exit Welcome to the Course Outline Export Wizard This Wizard will help you to export course slides as images to represent the course structure Exported course outline can be used for demonstration purposes Please note that exported course outline is not intended for use in LMS Click Next to continue qeyasino
258. ma mp3 and so on IMPORTANT When using audio files make sure to turn ON the feature under Module menu Runtime Settings which checks whether or not the system has the required component for playing specific audio formats 7 Animation At first the Slide contains only the single Frame It is possible to achieve animation effect by creating the sequence of the Frames with predefined duration of playback assigned to each Frame 7 1 Using Frames Use Frames panel for managing the Frames on the Slide To open Frames panel select View gt Frames Insert Format 4 Splash Ly Master Normal Slides Alt 1 Timeline Alt 2 Frames Alt 3 Course Alt 0 Task Pane In the bottom part of the Module window the Frames panel opens up Add as many frames as necessary using menu Insert gt Frame Make appropriate changes to each of them to reflect animation sequence 7 2 Frame Display Time Each individual Frame has its own display time To modify display time in the Frames panel select Advance item from the frame s context menu Advance Display Advance Immediate Cancel Specify display time in seconds IMPORTANT Specified Frame s display time has a higher priority over the display time of the objects within the same Frame in case this time is less than the display time of some objects then such objects will not be displayed at all
259. make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object G m Object parameters Farameters Display mode Transparent ayer HFFFFFF Wam if Hash Player secunty settings are too strict Use HTTPS in codebase attribute You can specify an Agent s appearance and display parameters similar to Flash movie display settings in fact an Agent is a Flash movie In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS If you do not know if you need it or not just left it set Object control By default Object is displayed in idle mode for an indefinite period of time Object Methods functions embedded in the Object which modify the state of the Agent are used to control the Agent See detailed description of object control in Agent document Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Agent Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in
260. mbals Cancel Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers and must not start with a digit Variable names must be unique within a Slide or Module depending on selected variable scope If necessary specify default text which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up If necessary you may set restrictions on user input length of value in characters Text Input un a EL Border width R Border color Background color Font au Font size Font weight Font style A E a 4 Ul E Use sound effects Keypress sound Standard 1 ay Sound file SSS On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Field Focus Lost At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field Object Methods
261. me one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 1 MHormal Border color Fill color mairr Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle _ Buttons on description pane On the Button tab you can define buttons display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise Image Gallery 1 Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background block on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 1 Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound Ol Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to cus
262. me active Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures e The first picture displays the Sound button in On state and the button can be pressed to turn the Sound Off specify path to the image under Enabled Off Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Off Button e The third picture displays the Sound button in Off state and the button can be pressed to turn the Sound On specify path to the image under Enabled On Button e The fourth picture will replace the third one in case user moves mouse over the enabled turn On button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver On Button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Sound Button Parameters Sound i Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Ww Click sound Standard 1 Ww Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result TOGGLE SOUND Toggles sound on and off Object Specific Properties Along with common object propertie
263. media stops on the end of media on Position Changed Fires when current position is changed by slider control or method on Media Changed At the moment when player media is changed on Media Error At the moment when player generates media error on Waiting Server At the moment when player starts for waiting server responce Response on Reconnect To Server At the moment when player starts reconnecting to server on Start Buffering Media At the moment when player starts buffering on Preparing Media At the moment when media is loaded and player starts preparing on Media Is Ready At the moment when media is loaded and player is ready to start Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result PLAY STOP PAUSE SET PROPERTY REPLACE MEDIA Start playing clip Stops playing clip Pauses playing Use PLAY method to continue from paused Sets one of the player properties Replaces video source of player Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Note that these properties are available only for Windows Media Player and QuickTime Player not for Real Player Property autoStart mute volume currentMedia duration currentPosition Returns Returns 1 if AutoStart is set to true O otherwise Returns
264. mme uae eons eames E Se oueaas ess A 14 BZ CHAPTER cia T E T T tea naneesalesiinie aaa A O 15 SRDE oaa E A eS ee aa A ee 15 FRAME oror E EE A EO E E E ON 15 JIMAS TER S MDE ganea a a a AS 16 SO PTE SLIDE verrei E E EOE OE O T T TETE OE E E OTO TA 16 4 HOW TO CREATE COURSE inasin E E ETN A 17 A Pr EARN AO COURSE SONA O a N 17 AA NEW COURSE WIZARD iriri sar cates caren O cee E EES SES AT TE E TREES ETE A N S 18 A EDIN OM ODUTE ea aa a a a a a a NR 20 W LEONG TUE SUGE orii E T O T T N E le a E EAE 20 ABZ Editing Master Slide sneinen E T E E NE ee 21 T SEUNG SAE inie A E EEE OTEN E E EREE NE E TTE ON 22 LSA AGUDO SIOE Ee EE EEE A E E 25 UNESE ALAN ETENEE 1O AAE EAA EATE EATEN eae AAA EIEN TEA EAN EAE ETES SA 26 AA ADDING MODULE Soni r an a aaa a a a a a cate a alae a ine a esse 26 Ao ADONG CHAPTER Sennar a a aa a A a cetera cust 27 AG PUBISH GOORSE rinena a a a end EA oosenaees 28 4 0 1 Mode RUNTIME SCCUROS erissue tesne a a a a eds Dida te Re a a a a 29 AGP COUISE RUNUME SENGS oS EERE EEA EAO tenner oawaaiee 31 46 3 Course P ubICatioOn VV IZGTO iriencsiseiedei ioiii iai ed a e a t lout atte a a aa ie iaia 32 AOA PUDIGOTION FOU CD r r iio des A A E E O T Lad 0d a 34 AO SPUD COTO F Or ALCCLMS areinitiras i RN ETO AN O O E E O O 35 4 6 6 Publication FOF SCORM I2 CMS sirocic iae ea nde 37 46 7 FUDHCOTION OF SCORM 2004 LMS czeccoziecativtrectsankannarethuscsetediavettqaaacdvantacnaitoeusdieauasasaiindtad A a 38 4 6 8 Uploading into COUTSELOD TeaM Wo
265. mmon practice to combine both learning material and tests in one single Learning Module In this case upon completion of the learning material learner is tested within the same Learning Module In the Learning Management System the Learning Module is one of the component part of the Learning Course and the only dynamic structural unit system collects information regarding completion of the Learning Module When processing information about status of all Learning Modules the system changes the completion state of not only the particular sections of the Course but also Learning Course itself with accordance to the rules defined in the particular Learning Management System From the education methodology point of view Learning Module corresponds to lesson or lecture meaning it supposed to have thematically coherent and completed learning material 3 2 Chapter Modules created in CourseLab can be thematically combined in Chapters Chapters can be grouped within another Chapters resulting in complicated Course hierarchy structure Although there is no limitation for number of Chapters and number of sub Chapters within a Chapter it is strongly recommended to avoid using too complex hierarchy structure The reason is that you do not mean to discourage student from pursuing this Course just because the structure of that Course is too hard to apprehend Within Learning Management System the Chapter is usually displayed as a folder containing Modules an
266. mouse button To interrupt resizing of the object press Esc key Resizing objects using keyboard 1 Select desired object 2 Hold down Shift key Press the arrow keys to move right and bottom part of the object s border The above mentioned methods can be also employed for resizing multiple objects Precise resizing of the object 1 Select desired object 2 Open Format dialog window by specifying Format Object command which is available either by selecting Format menu item from the context menu or by pressing button in the toolbar 3 Select the Size page on the dialog window 4 Specify new values for the Width and the Height of the object Format Colors and Lines Size Position Display Sound Size and rotate Width Height Rotation ie oh You can also use Format window for resizing several selected objects When Format dialog window is opened the Width and the Height fields will be populated with the sizing values only if these values are identical for all the selected objects If you leave the field empty corresponding size will remain unchanged for each object Format Object command is also available from the object s context menu in the Frame Structure section of the Tasks Panel When you insert the Object of any shape into the Frame it is placed into the Rectangular Placeholder There are 3 types of Objects allocation within the Rectangular Placeholder e Object that can autom
267. movie file which you are going to insert Next file will be automatically copied into the images folder of learning Module LIMITATION During insertion of the Shockwave movie object the content for this object is unknown to the CourseLab editor therefore movie placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead 5 3 9 3 Video Video clip object is used for playing Video clips in the different formats Windows Media Player is used by default for playing MPEG AVI and WMV formats For FireFox browser family it is recommended to install latest version of Microsoft Windows Media Player plugin from Port 25 Team http port25 technet com pages windows media player firefox plugin download aspx QuickTime Player is used by default for playing QuickTime MOV and 3gp formats Note that QuickTime Player must be installed on learner s computer free download at http www apple com quicktime Real Player is used by default for playing clips in Real Media RM RAM and RPM files Note that RealMedia Player must be installed on learner s computer free download at http www real com IMPORTANT Additional software should be installed on the computer for playing video clips To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature which checks whether or not required software has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Module menu Runtime Settings Checks
268. movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ D queue 5 3 11 2 Talking Head The Talking Head is an animated character with a set of basic Actions these Actions can be launched using Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Object parameters Talking Head Parameters Head Grandfather Display mode Transparent layer E ground color The Talking Head is actually a Flash movie so its appearance and display parameters can be manipulated in a similar manner In case Warn if security settings are too strict checkbox is set and there is no possibility to setup connection with Agent Flash movie warning message will appear Use HTTPS in codebase attribute is used to check Flash Player version using secure protocol HTTPS
269. mported and ready to use A e v MD r et O Version 2 4 12 License management CourseLab license management uses hardware or software HASP keys based on SafeNet Inc technology CourseLab application is the same for both types of keys i e installed CourseLab application will work with any of these keys that will be found 12 1 HASP HL key USB dongle License managing using HASP HL key is very simple license is present on the computer where key is inserted in USB port If HASP driver is installed without errors then inserted USB dongle is lit with red light constantly If there are problems with driver or USB dongle itself then key does not lit at all or blinking Current license and key state can be viewed via browser http localhost 1947 Functional key will be listed as on the picture below E CG D kah i A a zemine HASP Admin Contre Center SafeNet Sentinel HASP Please note that USB dongle firmware must have version 3 25 or higher 12 2 HASP SL key software key License management using HASP SL key involves the exchange of information between the computer on which the software key is installed and the CourseLab Licensing Server Software key unlike hardware key binds to computer where it is installed It cannot be transferred to another computer as easy as hardware key therefore please install it on the computer where you plan to work with CourseLab Current license and key
270. n Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method Mf METHOD Object Method Perform Action Cancel In this example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching the Action However any other Events or delayed Actions can be employed for the same purpose Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Agent Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action
271. n be published on the Internet Learning Management Systems LMS CD ROMS and other devices 1 1 Key Features of CourseLab e WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get environment for creating and managing high quality interactive eLearning content e No HTML or other programming skills required e Object oriented Model allows constructing eLearning content of almost any complexity just as easy as you put together the building blocks e Interface based on an Open Object Model enables to easily extend and enhance existing libraries of objects and templates including those created by the user e Embedded mechanisms for objects animation e Add any rich media content like Macromedia Flash Shockwave Java and video in different formats e Easy mechanism for inserting and synchronization of sound files e Import PowerPoint presentations into the learning material e Built in screen capture mechanism which enables emulating functionality of different software e Embedded event action mechanism e Advanced users can access CourseLab Objects and runtime variables and functions via JavaScript 1 2 System requirements CourseLab Editor system requirements e Microsoft Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 2008 e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e 80MB hard drive space e 1 free USB port if hardware key is used Minimum system requirements for viewing learning modules for computers and mobiles e operating system e Microsoft Windows 98
272. n line feed character once the length of text line exceeds the right margin Automatic hard Wrap If Text Area is enlarged wrap point will remain at the same position e Move to a new line only when Enter button is pressed otherwise horizontal scroll bar will be displayed once the length of text line exceeds the right margin Manual wrap Note By pressing the Enter key CRLF is inserted in either one of the above mentioned cases Text Input Area un a EL Border width R Border color Background color Font au Font size Font weight Font style A E a 4 Ul E Use sound effects Keypress sound Standard 1 Ww Sound file SSS On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Field Focus Lost At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field Object Methods The state of the Obj
273. n be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example sOBJ_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area will remain intact Example of object appearance Header text Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat Ut wisi enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exerci tation ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te feugait nulla facilisi Object parameters Standard popup window Parameters Sound Color scheme Lightblue s Header text Window text SSR Inner margin px Display popup close button F Close window on mouse click Cancel Select color scheme for the object The Base color refers to the color of the window title and border The background color for the
274. n capture You may simply remove this frame The blue tracing lines on the Frame are reflections of the mouse movements they will not be visible when replaying When required you can modify the location of the mouse clicks you can drag them and or remove unwanted clicks completely in this case the trace of the mouse path will be automatically adjusted Note that you can also modify the cursor shape speed of movements and time duration for holding down the mouse button To accomplish these modifications right click on the cursor image and select Format Cursor from the context menu However the captured set of frames is not quite finished and should be considered groundwork for future editing Most likely you are going to need to provide additional supporting explanations in a form of balloons or popup windows From the editor s point of view each captured Frame can be treated as a typical Frame the only difference is the recorded mouse movements On any of the captured frames you can insert additional Objects from the Objects library balloons popup pictures etc On all captured frames you can use Actions change timeouts and so on just like with any other frames By default the replay time for a particular Frame is defined by the time spent on mouse movements However you can manually change a Frame display time if necessary Right click on the necessary Frame and use the Transition item from the contex
275. n events as you need beforedisplay atterdisplay Zonkeydown Space SaBhl gt amp GOTO Frame FRAME_5 Option Spectfied Frame IF COMPLETION STATUS IF SCORE IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT METHOD MOVE START MOVE STOP MSGBOX NAVIGATION PRINT 8 2 Actions Actions are predefined changes of the object state and or module variables which are used for composing complex object behavior To create actions you can either employ built in actions which are listed in the Action Panel or use JavaScript if you are familiar with this language Built in actions e EXTERNAL URL enables opening resource external to the Learning Module in the new Browser Window e RETURN performs transition to the Slide where action CALL was previously executed e ROTATE START initiates object rotating e ROTATE STOP discontinues object rotating e CALL enables transition to the specified Slide e MOVE START initiates moving of the object within a frame e MOVE STOP interrupts movement of the selected object or all currently moving objects e F conditional action executes set of subordinate actions if condition expression is evaluated to true e IF COMPLETION STATUS Branches actions depending on completion status e IF SCORE Branches actions depending on score e IF SUCCESS STATUS conditional action executes set of subordinate actions depending on the Success Status of the specified objective
276. n over long on click v Preview in editor Long description Short description Description text Transition Random dissolve Duration Color scheme Use pointer scheme Gradient angle Border width Comer arc size 0 1 02 Sound file Long description Description text Transition Random dissolve Duration Color scheme Use pointer scheme Gradient angle Border width Comer arc size 0 1 Sound file On the Description tab you can select events that will trigger display of descriptions and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e transition effect e You can also attach sound file to each description swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects this description Pointer with description w Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Ww Click sound Standard 1 Ww Cancel Apply Help On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable del
277. n when we have both a question and a Talking Head character presented in a Slide The Talking Head s task is to be amazed when the provided response to the question is incorrect Test Course First Slide Meow is the cry of Cat Cow Dog Here is the sequence of the necessary Actions 1 Memorize character ID and open Actions screen for the Question Object Event Ibje Action ondrop METHOD Object 0BJ_ 17 Method Perom Action CALL i CHECKHIT EFENA DELAY ondragout DISPLAY ondragover ELSE beforedisplay EXTERNAL URL afterdisplay FOR On Display Question GOTO On Change Choice IF SUCCESS STATUS On Attempt 4 JAVASCRIPT On Success METHOD om MOVE STOP papas MSGBOX pipes E NAVIGATION On Skip Question RETURN On Question Answered ROTATE START ROTATE STOP IF 2 Select On Failure in the Event panel 3 Select METHOD in the Action panel 4 Specify parameters for the selected Action select character ID in the Select Method screen specify ACTION with the following parameters Amazement and Return upon completion Confirm your choice At this point configuration of the relationship among the Objects is completed Select Method Z ACTION TELEPORT EE METHOD Object Method Fefom ction Action Amazement ka In the above example the Event of the Question Object has been used for launching Action However any other Events or d
278. nd Question i Sconng Feedback Display Question text Variants Variant Grind coffee beans Place ground coffee in espresso machine Tum espresso machine on Enjoy the taste of fresh espresso Varant weight is used only if comesponding scoring Cancel To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Use button to specify possible answers as many as needed In the opened sub dialog screen press TE button of the corresponding field and insert text of the variant Note that for this type of question the correct Order of Items will be the order specified by author Question items are ALWAYS presented randomly to the user Use Up and Down arrows to change items order Ordering Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Number of attempts Limit time for the answer Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recuring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Help Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically
279. nd again if above mentioned example is an essential part of the main course the linear Course structure should be taken into consideration Ideally learner should be able to go through the entire Course only by pressing Next button Specifics of delivering Learning Material Pieces of the Learning Material should be reasonably sized e Break down the Learning Material into chunks of learning content Build the clear hierarchy structure If learning material is extensive break it down into Modules with respect to thematic coherence clear and consistent story lines and content It is not recommended to group more than one learning subject into one Module better use more Modules in the Course than overload the Modules with different learning subjects Use thematic coherence inside each Module to distribute learning assessment into the Slides e One Topic per Slide The learning material in the Course is divided into the Slides Although there is a thematic relationship among the slides we do not recommend using several slides for covering a single learning Topic Ideally use only one Topic per Slide Use Interactive Multimedia features e Utilize multimedia illustrations and graphics eLearning has a huge advantage over conventional learning since eLearning introduces multimedia content Animated schemes or Flash movie is often more comprehensive than lengthy descriptions and should be used to full extent to explore the Topic within a Slide
280. nd mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Change Selection User changes selected item on Attempt on Success on Failure on Time Out on Attempts Limit At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions
281. nd off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Tab block top tabs Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound J Apply On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 6 Tab block with buttons Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Example of object appearance The eggplant jal Solanum melongena ed a Wad SAES GO KONN Ge ba NIT genus Solanum it bears a fruit of the same name commonly used as a vegetable in cooking As a nightshade it is closely related to the tomato and potato and is native to Bangladesh Pakistan Sri Lanka and India it is a delicate perennial often cultivated as an annual It qrows 40 to 150 cm 16 Object parameters Tab block bottom buttons Button height Symbols on buttons Symbol sequence Font Font style Font size px Button comer arc size from Ota 1 Descript
282. nds if exists Returns current question type tokens choice select range numeric text Returns allowed question duration in seconds if exists Returns current question timer value in seconds if exists Returns total variants quantity Returns current question answer value format corresponds to question type Returns current number of attempts Returns allowed number of attempts Syntax SOBJ_ID testMode Returns current question number starting from O first question has O SOBJ_ID questionNumber number SOBJ_ ID totalQuestionQuantity SOBJ_ D testDuration SOBJ_ D testTimer SOBJ_ID questionType oto SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ ID itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal QTI TestObject allows to display questions from the external QTI file IMPORTANT This Object can support only QTI 1 2 files full support of QTI standard is not guarantied QTI file cannot be used in edit mode therefore only placeholder of the QTI Test is visible Bperana tect MD Oiam 00 cen Mpamep TEXKCTa BAPHSHTS SAHHCTEEHHH Boop E Mipamep TeXcTa BapHaHTa MHOMeCTEeHHE Bebop Mowmep Texcta BaphanTa ynopapouneanne The same Object in real Course looks different in sequential mode by Question WiOROD Epema na tect Qi arem 47 cex Bongor 4 ma T ConocTasste CPAN H HX CTONML bI
283. ne in the tasks area It displays images thumbnails from the folder on the computer To add picture into the Slide drag image thumbnail into the working area Unlike using the Insert From File menu the above mentioned picture inserting method eliminates the inconvenience of specifying the path to the picture file each time within Open dialog box Use Insert gt Picture gt Clip Art sub menu to start using Images collection or Insert Clip Art Icon in the toolbar In the right part of the main editor window tasks area will open up displaying the selected pane Clip Art Format Tools Module Window Help gt New Slide Ctrl M Insert PF iam 100 Duplicate Slide New Frame Ctrl Shift M AS Text Box hg Object h Cursor Auto Shapes Timeline Actions EF Scenario Click Browse link at the bottom of the Clip Art Pane to specify folder containing pictures which will be accessible from the Clip Art Pane In the opened Select Folder dialog box select folder containing pictures To place picture on the slide simply drag and drop image icon into slide area 5 3 Complex Objects 5 3 1 Rapid Development 5 3 1 1 Image Gallery 1 with paging Image Gallery 1 is used for displaying multiple images in one block with paging i e one by one In case width or height of the image is more than object s image block images will be automatically resized to fit th
284. nged in multiple select question Item configuration changed in order question Value changed in numeric question Value changed in text question Item configuration changed in matching pairs question At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined After answer evaluated in case the number of attempts decreased to zero After Skip Question button is pressed After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Every second while test timer is active At the moment of time expiration for the whole test if defined After all questions are answered or test timeout Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property testMode questionNumber totalQuestionQuantity testDuration testTimer questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal 5 3 14 2 QTI Test Returns Returns current test mode tokens normal review Returns total questions quantity in current test Returns allowed test duration in seconds if exists Returns current test timer value in seco
285. ns controls for popup window displaying parameters You can select the border color for the object with respect to the overall design of the learning Module Also you can modify title text and style You can modify size and location of popup window with respect to the design of the learning Module however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes search Popup Window l Styles ll Sound Use default button set Disabled button tooltip Search disabled Strict Navigation mode Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following five pictures The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button The third picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button The fourth picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button The fifth picture displays Help Popup Window Close button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for buttons Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the
286. nswers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Matching Groups Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations scaring Feedback Display Scoring type Weight of question attempt Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed regressive Question objectives d E Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when pr
287. ntain pictures tables links etc Scroll bar will be added automatically when text size will exceed Description Area size For each element you can define sound file with narration Display this tab selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Tab selected from the start and also displaying its preview in Edit mode In case no Tab is selected first Tab will be selected by default In case more than one Tab is selected first selected Tab will be active others will be ignored Custom color Brightness Color scheme selected Custom color Fill brightness Border width Tab width 2 Tab font Custom font Font size Font style Margin top bottom Margin left right Shadow sen Select color schemes for idle and selected states one of predefined or custom You can also lighten or darken colors of selected color schemes Change tab width in percents of full Object width and Tab font settings Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Title font Custom fort Font style Ay On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Custom color HEEEEFF Fibres Border width 1 px Margin top bottom Margin left right On Descriptions tab you can change display parameters for Description Area
288. ntal margin Vertical margin o piels ate Applet parameters t Define margins if necessary Alt text will be displayed to user if there is no Java installed on the computer Applet parameters will be transferred to applet on launch Java applet Files Parameters Java machine Cancel Java Machine selection has practical meaning in very rare cases 5 3 9 5 Flash Video Flash Video clip object is used for playing Video clips in Flash Video format FLV IMPORTANT The Adobe Flash Player 9 or higher should be installed on the computer for playing Flash Video You can get the latest free version of Adobe Flash Player at http Avww adobe com To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Module menu Runtime Settings Checks LIMITATION Flash Video file must contain metadata to allow full functionality of the object i e file must be converted in FLV 1 1 format If your FLV file is converted with FLV 1 0 converter then only basic object methods and properties can be used though FLV file still can be played Flash movie cannot be played in edit mode only placeholder of the movie is visible Object parameters Flash video Parameters Hash video source File C Courses 2 4 sandbox 200712271ima Display mode Backgroun
289. o the base weight Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Numeric Fill In Blank Question i Button Texts l Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display F Display corect answer Prev Corect answer F incorect answer incorect F No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal pa Ofset vertical pot Feedback box width px _ Hide feedback automatically Backgroun Border Button om ore Emm
290. ocks auto shapes and special objects from the Navigation folder All other Master Slide editing features are based on WYSIWYG editing mode 4 3 3 Editing Slide To turn On Regular Slide editing mode use View gt Normal sub menu or quick switching button in the Slide s Panel D4 CourseLab Test Mo it View Insert O Title Format Ti Master Alt 1 Slide 2 of 5 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 0 Task Pane The following settings of the Slide can be edited e Name ofa Slide e Selecting Master Slide e Slide Content e Slide Comments e Slide Transition 4 3 3 1 Name of a Slide Usually the name of a Slide reflects the main topic of a Slide The name of a Slide appears on every Frame of this Slide in case Master Slide has a corresponding object Slide Name which enables display of this text Besides that the name of a Slide is mentioned in the table of contents of the Module again if Master Slide has the corresponding Heading objects defined Ga Copy G3 Paste even if the name is not displayed on the Slide itself 15 New Slide Delete Slide By default newly created Slide is titled as Untitled In order to change the name of a Slide right click on it and choose ae Rename option from Context menu Identifier Master Limitation The newly edited name of a Slide will not be a Advance displayed right away in edit mode but it will be visible in Vi
291. od name Execution Result PLAY Start playing Flash movie STOP Stops playing Flash movie REWIND Rewind the movie to the start position PAUSE Pauses playing CONTINUE Continues playing from paused state 5 3 9 2 Shockwave Shockwave movie object is used for playing Adobe Shockwave movies created using Adobe Shockwave technology Adobe Shockwave movie files have dcr extension Adobe Shockwave technology is far more versatile than Adobe Flash The wider range of the features has a drawback in terms of size of the Adobe Shockwave movie complexity of creation and requirement to have a Adobe Shockwave player installed Although Adobe Shockwave player is distributed free of charge it has a bigger size and it is less universal compared to Flash Player Nevertheless if you have a Adobe Shockwave movie you can insert it into the Frame just as easy as Adobe Flash movie IMPORTANT The Adobe Shockwave Player software should be installed on the computer for playing Shockwave movies You can get the latest free of charge version of Adobe Shockwave Player at http www adobe com To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature which checks whether or not Shockwave Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Module menu Runtime Settings Checks Object parameters Shockwave movie T 1 images Iblank der Cancel Specify path to the Shockwave
292. of objects MOVE START action will be ignored MOVE START objectid Object edit X edit Y select Additive time Duration Parameters Object String Identifier of the object which will be moved X Number or expression must have numeric value Defines horizontal coordinate in pixels of the point where the object will finish its move depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute i e counted off frame s top left corner or relative to the current value Y Number or expression must have numeric value Defines vertical coordinate in pixels of the point where the object will finish its move depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute i e counted off frame s top left corner or relative to the current value Additive Token Possible values Value Description Replace Specified x and y coordinates define the absolute coordinates of the point where the object will be moved Add Specified x and y coordinates will be added to the current ones i e the object will be moved with regards to added coordinates relative to the object s current position Duration Number Defines time in seconds of object relocation Zero value corresponds to instant object relocation 8 2 7 MOVE STOP MOVE STOP action interrupts movement of the selected object or all currently moving objects MOVE STOP objectid Object select A _ Objects Parameters Object String T
293. of the learning Module however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Help Popup Window Window Button Sound _ Use default button set Enabled button OnMouseOver button OnClick button Disabled button Window close button Enabled button tooltip Disabled button tooltip Access is not allowed Close button tooltip Close help window Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following five pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button e The fourth picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button e The fifth picture displays Help Popup Window Close button You can specify mouse over tooltip m
294. olor of the box border with respect to the overall design To input text into the text box press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in If needed modify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between box border and text By default text margin is equal to 5 pixels Set Overflow style if needed default value Autoscroll is suitable for most cases If appropriate checkbox is marked text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a box Relief Text Box Parameters Hfec Typewriter effect Cancel On the Effects tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text Refreshed After text is refreshed on Text Added After text is added on Typewriter End After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character Object Methods The state of the Object can be mod
295. om the list and press Operation button The logical operators can be grouped by using round parentheses Select conditions from the list and press Group button to add parentheses Select conditions inside of parentheses and press Ungroup button to remove parentheses Conditions Each condition defines one of the following checks 1 Slides Visited Condition is satisfied if during Module execution all the Slides in sequence including the ones with defined identifiers were viewed by the student Condition Slides Visited SLIDE_1 Objective Score Objective Success ai SLIDE_6 Objective Completion 2 Objective Score Condition is satisfied if value of the actual objective s score for the defined condition is for example greater or equal to the specified value For comparison of specified score with actual score the following operators are employed lt gt lt gt and lt gt Condition Slides Visited Objective Score Objective Success Objective Completion 3 Objective Success Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective Success Status corresponds to the specified one Condition Slides Visited objective Objective Score Objective Success Passed Objective Completion 4 Objective Completion Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective Completion Status corresponds to the specified one Condition Slides Visited objective Objective Score l Objective
296. om the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Search Tab Use defaut slide icon set a a oe Search options Enable case sensitivity selection Enable search logic selection By default Search logic ade Search results Link onhy hai The Search tab contains options for search processing You can disable user controls for selecting case sensitivity and search logic selection in this case user cannot change these settings in the search form and default search settings will be applied in every search e Case sensitive option sets default case sensitivity for search process e Search logic defines search inclusion in case user enters more than one word in query Any word means that all Slides or Objects containing any of eneterd words will be found i e OR operation All words means that only Slides or Objects containing all of enetersd words will be found i e AND operation e Search logic SCOPE means the scope to which Search logic will be applied Slide or Object e Search results can be presented as simple links or links with short text fragment Search Tab Slides found No results found Empty query nothing to search On the Texts tab you can define messages and tooltips that will be presented to learner Search Tab Styles tab contains style parameters for presenting search form and results Searc
297. on in this case in the Name field specify name and scope of existing variable 8 2 21 GOTO GOTO action enables transition to the specified Frame of the Slide This action is similar to CALL action the only difference is that no visit history information is stored GOTO frameid Frame select Option Parameters Frame String Target Frame identifier where transition will be performed to Value of this control will be ignored in case Option parameter is set to any value except for Specified Frame Option Token Defines target of transition Possible values Value Description Specified Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame that is selected in Frame control Next Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame which is next to current Frame if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Previous Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame which is previous to current Frame if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Next Slide Transition will be performed to the first Frame of the Slide which is next to current Slide if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Previous Slide Transition will be performed to the first Frame of the Slide which is previous to current Slide if exists Value of Frame control is ignored 8 2 22 PRINT PRINT action calls standard browser s Print dialog window PRINT Parameters No parameters 8 2 23 DISPLAY DISPLAY action enables turning ON OFF object
298. on from the taskbar CourseLab Editor window will be restored and all captured frames will be available for editing 10 4 Modifying capture settings while in capture mode After switching to the capture mode editor minimizes into the icon on the windows taskbar and red rectangular enclose appears which limits the area or capturing S Internet Jo CourseLab will try to adjust captured application window to the specified area size Tre Precutes Of Lust Dateren Prd Le Cafes Wert Away g Mee Ome The Voce The Sws iadro On Froen Doors 4 Gack To The Rivers Of Bete tee Tott However some programs will not allow doing so In this case you can manually adjust screen capture area to fit the target window or opposite target window to fit screen capture area You can modify screen capture area by dragging red border or by using context menu of the capture area Resize Window Of Belief Back To The Ri Size MCMXC a D E 453 mo Resize Frame Adjust screen capture area to fit the target window Select Resize Frame item from the context menu Screen capture area will automatically adjust its size to the current window size of the target application Adjust target window to fit the screen capture area Select Resize Window item from the context menu Editor will automatically attempt adjusting size of target window to the size of screen capture area If target program di
299. on method will become ineffective Possibility to Skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Text Fill In Blank Question i Button Texts l Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Display feedback messages Prev Corect answer F Incorrect answer Incorrect C No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset honzontal pa Ofset vertical pot Feedback box width px _ Hide feedback automatically Backgroun Border Button om ore Emm fms G ren ren C roms oreo jaro ren roms ore Tsou srren aran eee C Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may perm
300. on of this action identifier of the current Slide remains in memory as a parameter for the RETURN action CALL frameid Frame select Option Parameters Frame String Target Frame identifier where transition will be performed to Value of this control will be ignored in case Option parameter is set to any value except for Specified Frame Option Token Defines target of transition Possible values Value Description Specified Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame that is selected in Frame control Next Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame which is next to current Frame if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Previous Frame Transition will be performed to the Frame which is previous to current Frame if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Next Slide Transition will be performed to the first Frame of the Slide which is next to current Slide if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Previous Slide Transition will be performed to the first Frame of the Slide which is previous to current Slide if exists Value of Frame control is ignored Remarks RETURN action performs transition to the Slide where action CALL was previously executed 8 2 6 MOVE START MOVE START action initiates moving of the object within a frame LIMITATION The object which can be dragged by mouse i e corresponding checkbox in Object properties is checked can not be turned or moved For this type
301. on the Frame within the Slide where the simulation will be fitted this is the requirement for setting up simulation recording IMPORTANT CourseLab does not support auto scaling for captured screens Screen captures will be performed only within user defined area in scale of 1 1 Therefore make sure that defined size of the captured screen enables recording all required information from the target software If of size insufficiency you might need to change template of the current Slide to increase size of recording area Specify a graphic format for storing screen captures Select the Settings item from the Service menu on the Screen Capture tab specify the desired file format As long as you do not have any specific restrictions we recommend using PNG format for screen capturing since this format performs best in terms of quality and size of the saved files Even though you can correct results later on you should determine the screen capturing scenario beforehand in order to avoid mistakes 10 2 Screen Capture Wizard While on the slide which is to be used for recording the simulation select Capture Screens item from the Tools menu Module Tools Module Window Help Import from Power Point Recalc Display Times b Add Moduleto Templates Compress Images Options Screen Capture Wizard opens up screen Capture Welcome to the Screen Capture Wizard With a help of ty I this Wiz
302. ons tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration it will be credited to the user 3 Possibility to skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt 4 Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again recurring approaches
303. operties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ID disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open 0 otherwise SOBJ_ID open value Returns current value from calculator display SOBJ_ID value 5 3 10 7 Settings Tab Settings Tab object enables displaying current Settings or Statistics for the Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Settings This is optional description of objectives Module state Total score 5 10 Module objectives state Objective name Score ni o0 5 vi Second obj o 10 Object parameters settings Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab Onitousel ver Tab Disabled Tab OnClick Tab Border color Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip Module parameters disabled In case the default tab is used you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color settings Tab Display Parameters Objectives Texts Sound Display description
304. or Countdown color Attention color Finish color On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Matching Groups Question _ Use custom buttons Button type Submit answer text Skip question tert Button size width pe height ps Norral Mousel ver Border style Border width Border color Background color Font Custom Font Font size Font weight Font style Font color Text align Matching Groups Question QUESTION IS SKIPPED AND FAILED Tooltip on Detach match Click on the slot to detach VWaming messages Continued approach Number of attempt This question is already answered Rec This question is already answered Pres Skipped question will be treated failed No more empty slots in this group Matching Groups Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 s Click sound Standard 1 s Failure sound Standard 1 Success sound Standard 1 Help On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s a
305. or height shorter one e border width in pixels e interbutton spacing Tab block bottom buttons Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Tab block top tabs Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 7 Tab block accordion Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Example of object appearance The eggplant aubergine begun or brinjal Solanum melongena is a plant of the family Solanaceae also known as the nightshades and genus Solanum It bears a fruit of the same name commonly used as a vegetable in cooking As a nichtshade itis clos
306. or height shorter one e inner margin Histogram Chart Events with sound Mouseover sound Sound file Click sound Sound file On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 2 5 Radar chart Radar chart is representing distribution of data in multiple series and by multiple axes Example of object appearance Lox fey H Define the list of data series on the Data series tab For all series you can define series type and displaying values methods For each series you can assign color scheme name of the series description text and its parameters Please note that series are displayed exactly in the order their values are entered counterclockwise from north direction Use button to open series properties dialog i Values by axes amp f GColorscheme Font size px Font weight Font style Normal L oO iT Sarate Br _ Preview description in editor MouseOver Selected Hfr ALL Hl gt Opacity 01 You can use one of predefined color schemes or select custom colors in this case color values from the right part of dialog will be used Fill in series values by axes Series name short text in legend Font parameters from right part of the dialog will be a
307. or tab description blocks gradient angle for background and common display parameters corner arc sizes and spacings Other params include e tab height in percent e corner radius in pixels or relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e border width in pixels e intertab spacing Tab block timeline Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Tab block timeline Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 9 Managed tab block vertical Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Th
308. ot Checked spot Use custom timer colors Border color A Background color E Countdown color a Attention color HFFCCA En Finish color On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages True False Question m em IC m 12 px 12 px 000000 000000 C Cent True False Question True False Question Question Limitations Scoring Button Texts Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 s Click sound Standard 1 s Failure sound Standard 1 Success sound Standard 1 Help On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Question Start The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed on Change Selection User changes selected item on Attem
309. ou cannot jump to this slide until you In case Altemative module path is set Display mode You can also modify appearance parameters for slide name captions Simple Progress Bar Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Ww Click sound Standard 1 we Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 10 19 Help Popup Window Help Popup Window object enables display of the help content for the learning Module Object consists of two parts button to call the object and pop up window with help content Only Help button is visible in editing mode LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Help eLearning Module Structure Learning Module is a fundamental building block of the Course hierarchy representing the set of author structured Slides During the learning process the learner is led from one Slide to another sequentially which is default behavior Slide Interactive page is the main building block of Learning Module Slides are used by the author to place learning material tests and exercises The order of Slide correlation is predefined by the author Navigation eLearning Module navig
310. ourse playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Selected User selects Menu Item Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ ID disabled value Returns current input field value SOBJ_ID value selectedName Returns currently selected item description SOBJ_ID selectedName 5 3 15 7 Button Pressed Button enables triggering of the previously created actions Example of Object appearance Click me Object parameters Parameters Display Sound Button text Cee oy re The only parameter on the first tab to fill is the button text
311. p 6 Handling Objects 6 1 Object position within a Frame 6 1 1 Object Selection In order to execute command against the object this object has to be selected Selected objects are outlined by markers which are also used for object s resizing The processing information regarding selected object is displayed in the status field within CourseLab In case multiple objects are selected status field contains only information pertaining to the last selected object Selecting objects in the workspace e To select object click on it using left mouse button e In order to select multiple objects left click on the desired object while holding down Shift or Ctrl key e To undo selection selectively left click on the object while holding down Shift or Ctrl key e Click anywhere within a Slide to undo selection of all objects e Use Ctrl A combination to select all object in the Slide Regardless the fact that objects placed on the Master Slide are visible on the standard Slides as well to select such objects they need to be opened within Master Slide Sequential objects Selection within workspace When object is selected you can also select the subsequent object by pressing Tab key e n order to select previous object from the sequence use Tab key while holding down Shift key Object s selection in the task panel 1 Use View gt Tasks Pane gt Frame Structure to open Frame Structure section within Tasks Panel 2 To
312. pearance Not attempted yet A 2 Matching pars question one to one l Connect events wth corresponding dates Statistics Attespts eft 0 Tine alowed 10 sec Soro type Question west into al objectives Attempts alowed I Time Gagpsed 5 sec a Objectives Soore Main module objective 1 Results Bases You have attached Correct 1492 OiscoweryofAmerica Oiscovery of Amenca 1903 Prst arpiane l Prst argiare 1945 The end of World War it The end of World Was I 19569 Frstmanonthe Moon First manon the Moon Object parameters Detailed results Text constants Display question text Display corect answers Display question score Display question timing Display statistics On the Objects tab you can define the list of Objects to display statistics and details to be displayed Detailed results Question text is not defined On the Text Constants tab you can edit all object text constants 5 3 15 Form 5 3 15 1 Text Field Text Field enables user to input text using keyboard Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user leaves field only Example of Object appearance Object parameters Text Input Input Display Sound Runtime variable name Vanable scope Curent ide Default value Maximal value length sy
313. pient to Host file select in the CourseLab application on the Recipient computer menu option Help gt License gt Cancel R2H file creation wizard opens up Transfer created R2H file to Host computer Note that Host is the only computer that will accept this file IMPORTANT From the moment of creation R2H file license on the Recipient computer is cancelled Reattaching the license on Host computer In the CourseLab application on the Host computer select menu option Help gt License gt Attach Locate transferred R2H file and press Next From this moment license will work on Host computer again 12 2 4 License deactivation IMPORTANT License deactivation means that you refuse from using CourseLab completely Deactivated license cannot be used anymore on any other computer Please be aware of this fact Deactivation procedure is an exchange of e mail messages containing files with a digital signature User sends files with digital signature of the HASP driver C2V customer to vendor reply contains digital signature of Licensing server V2C vendor to customer Select menu command Help gt License gt Deactivation License Deactivation Wizard will display procedure steps on the first screen Press Next to continue Deactivation Deactivation sequence License deactivation sequence License deactivation steps LCreate deactivation request C2V file and send it to your CourseLab supplier 2 Receive V2C file
314. ple cats waiting in ambush outside burrows but tending to actively stalk birds Object parameters Managed controls block Object activation order Display this element selecte No No No E Restore object state On the Elements tab you can define namaged Objects list and order in which they will be managed This Object can restore its state i e when learner returns to the Slide it will see Object in the same state m Object ID of the Object to be managed For each Object you can add sound file with narration Display this element selected from the start checkbox allows displaying this Object visible from the start In case no Object is selected first element will be selected by default In case more than one Object is selected first selected element will be active others will be ignored Custom fort Font style On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Display background Fill color HCCC Gradient calor HEEEEEE order color HFFFFFF Fill brightness Lightest Border width J px Gradient angle 0 Comer radius Inner margin Shadow strength On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border widt
315. pletion Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ID curState lastState Last state action one o
316. pplied to this text LIMITATION length of the text area is quite small please keep this text as short as you can It cannot be distributed in few lines one line only Long texts will be cut Please use description for long texts Description any rich text description that will be displayed in special description block near the diagram You can also attach sound file to each series swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects current element Preview description in editor checkbox allows to preview diagram with one of the description blocks displayed in edit mode if this checkmark is set on more than one sector only first description will be displayed Radar Chart Data series Pues Description and legend Background Sound Awes f Name Apples Oranges Plums Bananas Pears Number of points Normalize every axis independently C_ Use custom value for 100 Axes color Axes width Name font Font size Font weight Font style On the Axes tab you can switch displaying of histogram axes on and off and define its parameters There are options for scaling that defined by two checkmarks Normalize every axis independently and Use custom value for 100 e default none of checkmarks are set maximum value on all axes is treated as 100 this scale is applied to all axes e Normalize every axis independen
317. pt At the moment of answer acceptance but before answer evaluation on Success At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is correct on Failure At the moment of answer evaluation in case the answer is incorrect on Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer if defined on Question Skipped After Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode tokens normal review SOBJ_ID questionMode questionType truefalse SOBJ_ID questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined SOBJ_ D questionDuration questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined SOBJ_ID questionTimer questionValue Returns current question value string values true or false SOBJ_ID questionValue attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts left SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast 5 3 4 2 Single choice Single Choice Question object enables user to choose one correct item from a list of possible answers LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance Question is Scored Meow
318. question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Ordering Question Question Limitations _ Display corect answer Display feedback messages Prev Corect answer F Incorrect answer Incorrect C No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal par Ofset vertical px Feedback box width px Hide feedback automatically Backgrouni Border Button B gess g p E rer reed C eree C per C pie aren C per C pr C mena reed C pere C Pe JE Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is
319. r in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Tab block leftside tabs Hements Background Sound Events with sound Mouseover sound Click sound L_cancel_J aor J Hele On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 5 Tab block top tabs Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Example of object appearance Eggplant The eggplant aubergine begun or brinjal Solanum melongena is a plant of the family Solanaceae also known as the nightshades and genus Solanum It bears a fruit of the same name commonly used as a vegetable in cooking As a nightshade it is closely related to the tomate and potato and is native to Bangladesh Pakistan Sri Lanka and India it is a delicate perennial often cultivated as an annual It grows 40 to 150 cm 16 to 57 in tall with large coarsely lobed leaves that are 10 to 20 cm 4 8 in long and 5 to 10 cm 2 4 in Object parameters Tab block top tabs On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order Tab text Description text Sound file Color scheme Normal Border color CCCCCC
320. r some conventional file types Object can place the corresponding Icon into the Frame In case of undefined file type Text document Icon will be displayed Object parameters Some PDF description After inserting object into Frame specify path to the file which you are going to open Next File will be copied into the images folder of learning Module Input file Caption and choose location of the Caption with respect to position of the Icon Select the activation event to open file mouse click only on Icon mouse click only on Caption mouse click either on Icon or on Caption 5 3 3 2 External URL External URL object is used for opening an external Link in a separate Browser window The exceptional feature of the External URL object is an ability to fully control browser settings of the window being opened The settings are size of the Browser window and Browser navigation restrictions limited availability since Microsoft introduced additional Security settings in Windows XP SP2 Example of External URL appearance External URL Parameters Use one of default icons URL htto Avww courselab com Window size horz vert picels _ Enable browser window toolbar _ Enable browser window address bar _ Enable browser window status bar _ Enable browser window menu bar _ Enable browser window resize Enable browser window scrollbars Apply Help Object parameters After inserting object
321. r text Limit text Time units Display order Font Font size Font style Timer font color Limit font color Cancel Apply Autostart checkmark allows to start counting immediately on Module s loading If there already is some timer value that was stored in LMS e if stored value is less than limit then countdown will be resumed from stored value e if stored value is greater or equal to limit then object will fire on Time Out event and stop countdown Check Display time limit to enable user to view the limit Display countdown from limit to zero toggles counting type Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Timer Start Timer starts counting on Time Out Time limit is reached on Timer Tick Every second while timer counts Using this event with value property to launch actions on specific moment Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax state 1 timer is counting 0 t
322. r the British attack on Denmark in September 1807 British men of war supported the Swedish fleet during the Finnish War and had victories over the Russians in er the success of the Russian army on the ERARA cu Button height from full height Button amow offset par Description comer arc size from Oto 1 Border width Button inner margin Description inner margin Interbutton spacing Button descrption spacing None selected text On the Elements tab you can define list of elements and its descriptions in the displaying order Tab text Description text Sound file Color scheme Normal MouseOver Selected bret moe oer fore G Fill color main ceerF _ rrF C aose rt O arr O rer Use custom description fill color Background color Cancel For each element you can define Tab text short text for element Description text Rich Text field for full descrioption of the element Vertical scrolling will be added automatically and sound file which will be played on tab selection You can add sound file for each Tab Display this tab selected from the start makes current tab default tab If this checkbox is not checked at one of the tabs then None selected text will be displayed in description area at object display If checkbox is checked at more than one tab first checked tab becomes default others will be ignored Select one of the predefined color schemes or define custom colors f
323. rder width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin e event to start display mouse click or mouse over e display pointer line to element enables display of connecting line between sector and description block e use transitions on description enables using transitions on displaying description block LIMITATION Transitions work only in Internet Explorer Histogram Chart Display axes Color scheme Axes color Axes width Display axes points Value axis points qty Display grid Base for 100 On the Axes tab you can switch displaying of histogram axes on and off and define its parameters Histogram Chart Elements Description Axes Display background Color scheme Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size 1 Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width
324. rdless the number of attempts This score is equal to the base weight O Regression method In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth until all tries are used The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the automatically calculated one which is number of possible answers minus one otherwise regression method will become ineffective 4 Possibility to skip the question In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Single Choice Question Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display _ Display corect answer Prev Comect answer F incorect answer Incorect TE _ No more attempts No more attempts left F Timeout Time is out F Offset horizontal px Offset vertical par Feedback box width px Hide feedback automatically Backg
325. re to view full size Full size picture Click on the picture to close this pict On the Images tab you can define the list of images with their descriptions and optional sound files for each image transition effects Display original image in separate window checkmark allows opening original image Use button to open image properties dialog Select image file and fill Description field You can also attach sound file to each image swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects this image Image Gallery 1 Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size 0 015 from Oto 1 Inner margin 10 px On the Images block tab you can switch displaying of image block on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Image Gallery 1 Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin Block height 4 Interblock spacing On the Description tab you can switch displaying of descriptions on and off and define its display parameters e color sche
326. red Upon on Text Refreshed After text is refreshed on Text Added After text is added on Typewriter End After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result CLOSE Closes the object RESIZE Changes the size of the object Note that top left corner position of the object is fixed REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 13 4 Gradient Box Gradient Box enables placing the desired text into the box with optional border and different scrolling settings Compared to embedded regular text box this Text Box enables using scrolling and special effects for text occurrence Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text format is quite complex additional markers for substitution area are used double curle brackets Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas For example soss_19 x will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object s top left corner and att_left will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left If no substitution is found all double curle brackets area
327. result and answer the question once again recurring approaches Single Choice Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations scoring Feedback Display Credit question Scoring type Question objectives Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight for every objective must be set Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and SO forth In case of the credited question the following options are available 1 Scoring type There are 3 options for this question type o Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives o Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list o Variant weight in case of correct answer weight of variant will be placed to all objectives for question with no correct answer only 2 Weight of question attempt base for calculating score 3 The following crediting methods can be used o Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score rega
328. rices to 1 January 2007 _ This extension to the deadline enabled the Commission to consider the fossa ma Object parameters Simple Text Box _ ooo Parameters Effects Border color Border width Border style Inner margin Overflow style To input text into the text box press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in If needed modify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between box border and text By default text margin is equal to 5 pixels Set Overflow style if needed default value Autoscroll is suitable for most cases If appropriate checkbox is marked text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a box Simple Text Box Parameters _ Typewriter effect Cancel On the Effects tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Trigge
329. rk vicsrsiccccnsccccncss aea E ITE EE R ATES 39 A 7 EXPORT COURSE OUTUNE nesese a aa aa a aaa a a Na ites 40 5 OBJECTS crecca A A a a Gast balunanestedieatneasausverconaadenddlce 42 a E D E EIE tare one AA AAS ATE A EA TE AA E a sunt TE E A E I E E A E A A 43 PELUSO ONC s E N E A nach eaeaatIeeon 43 SPATNE A A EAE A EE TE E EEE T AE EEE AELE T EAE ace A EE A EAS EE T EE EAEE E 45 Dh I SIIAG STING OS sores ascites pric TE A AA E AA EAA T A aataetae 45 D222 Vald GrapiniGFle FOMMOUCS orreik eiae E T E TEETE TEET OT 45 D2 3 OPUMZINA PICOT CS rE E EGET TO T E TE E eediester ays 46 524A CHOATE PON oen E N A a N a a 48 Jo COMPLEX OBIECT S Porin annaa EA EOE O O EO 50 53L Rapid Development noenee a a aaa a i eda a a a a a 50 532 PIGEG VIS UONIZO CON oi eE vais hares cea ence OE EAR TE eka eee E E AE T Ea 130 ho Faro Re We GA cd 66 AE EEEE AE OT E SAO NA EE EEAO EEAO OEE AS EEEN 160 POE SONS secant AEE tne bret A EEE A ESEA AAE O EEES AE AE EEE AAA 164 Die DT ODUD ina a adaracanneseaaaecanesaeer aaeeceneee 256 IS ODOLOSTE tana nennstiied E A Go nesaae Dena award ncaa Tegas we datined canto anand TE 265 IAr DETON PRP CP TE en Teer NT Ee eee ATER TE Tee aA a en Crt Tree et Ten PAN O errr ye eA TER O A erry eer ree 271 DUEL SO aise chp ind A AE Visca lnc ol E wesc caus nc E ic E I E A E E P neces nd aol asamcaes 282 a KIM EUA Rare Rone he eee net PORE RET Pere OnE eet REPENS ee ET ee On PT Ree ICT one EA ERY Res tee Pat rere ee 284 ILO NOVIJA NON cir
330. rocess e Search logic defines search inclusion in case user enters more than one word in query Any word means that all Slides or Objects containing any of eneterd words will be found i e OR operation All words means that only Slides or Objects containing all of enetersd words will be found i e AND operation e Search logic SCOPE means the scope to which Search logic will be applied Slide or Object e Search results can be presented as simple links or links with short text fragment Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back simple Search Field Window Button Field Search Sound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Search Field ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Search Field 5 3 10 24 Load Progress Load Progress object is used to change the look of default load progress indicator LIMITATION
331. rom the right part of dialog will be used Element ID any unique for this object sequence of latin characters and numbers reserved for future use can be blank Numeric value defines angle value for this sector Actual angle will be calculated automatically sum of umeric values of all sectors will be treated as 360 Element text short text on the arc inside the sector Font parameters from right part of the dialog will be applied to this text LIMITATION length of the text arc is quite small please keep this text as short as you can It cannot be distributed in few lines one line only Long texts will be cut Please use description for long texts WARNING Choosing font parameters please make sure that you have selected fonts which are installed on learners computer Otherwise browser will use its default fonts and object appearance will be distorted Description any rich text description that will be displayed in special description block near the pie You can also attach sound file to each sector swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects this sector Preview description in editor checkbox allows to preview diagram with one of the description blocks displayed in edit mode if this checkmark is set on more than one sector only first description will be displayed Alements Background Sound Display element descriptions Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc si
332. roun Border Button cn fare psa JE rem FED C rane rr C Aitmpts FFED Fresse m Toe erreen C ross C ferree C EE ETE E Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner horizontal and vertical offsets Single Choice Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback _ Display Skin Color scheme Use custom spots Cancel On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Single Choice Question 120 aha z4 a MouseOver z es mn eG m 12 P
333. rs will be the ones specified by author Unlike the question base items which will be displayed in order they were inserted the matches will ALWAYS be displayed in random order Matching Pairs Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Set number of attempts automatically Number of attempts Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is _ Allow recuring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically i e checkbox Define automatically is not checked Number of Attempts field is available for input There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one for example 3 attempts for question with 4 answers 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on In case automatic attempts calculation is selected the number specified in the Number of Attempts field is ignored 2 Time limit for the answer Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections and the question will be validated for correctness even if Submit Answer button is not pressed
334. rse Course Mod To change Module s order do the following in the Course Pane drag Module with the mouse button to the parent element Course or Chapter Dragged Module will be placed at the end of the list 4 5 Adding Chapters Upon creation new Learning Course it contains only single Module which is not placed in the Chapter As the number of the Modules increases it might be necessary to group Modules into the Chapters To add new Chapter to the Course you can either select File gt New gt Folder or use context menu by right clicking on the name of the Course from the Course Pane Add required number of Chapters and fill them with the learning content 3 70061004 CourseLab Test Module SI File Edit View Insert Format Tools Module Window Help p Open Ctrl 0 Module Ctrl N EB ell Save Ctrl s Save All Ctrl Shitt s Course Runtime Settings Publish Course Recent Courses Exit cy File Edit View Insert Format Tools Module iG s aal 43 8 ka ge Fie ale 4 LT Course x Course 200 Module 1 Module 2 Test Modu Module Rename To change Chapter s order do the following in the Course Pane drag Chapter with the mouse button to the parent element Course or Chapter Dragged Chapter will be placed at the end of the list 4 6 Publish Course After completing of all editing tasks Course should be published Publishing Course
335. rst one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button e The fourth picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button e The fifth picture displays Help Popup Window Close button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for buttons Contents Popup Window Window Button Sound Use default slide icon set _ Display slide hierarchy Strict Navigation mode Strict slide order message You cannot jump to this slide until you Cancel Use default Slides icon set marker enables you to replace Slide s icons if desired The marker Show Slide hierarchy enables to modify display mode of the Slide s structure in the Module Besides you can replace images which represents hierarchy nodes if desired Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run time settings Contents Popup Window Window Button Display sound Use soun
336. s Method name Execution Result DISPLAY NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax lastltem Returns number of last displayed item starting from 1 SOBJ_ID lastltem nextitem Returns number of next displayed item if exists SOBJ_ ID nextltem totalltems Returns total number of items SOBJ_ D totalltems 5 3 12 2 Simple List Simple List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements It contains the list of items with built in display manipulation mechanisms IMPORTANT Since this object contains built in display mechanisms the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame Example of object appearance ltem text goes here tem text goes here Next Object parameters simple List tem list Description tem description goes here tem description goes here Space between items px Fill in the statements list You can select item appearance parameters for each list item Depending on selected display mode parameters list on this tab will be different Default mode is On user click this mode include text link form and image buttons all controls that activated with mouse click Define button or link
337. s Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS _s Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open O otherwise SOBJ_ID open 5 3 10 8 Search Tab Search Tab object enables search functionality within the current Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Object parameters Search Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab OUnttousel ver tab Disabled tab OnClick Tab Border color Area size horizontal Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip Search disabled In case the default tab is used you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object fr
338. s gt tem tngne Enigma Ergma Enone Ergma trogne Ergma Cigna aen r i LT Modify size of the special capture area by dragging border and press PrintScrn woe Innocence I Love You ITKE You a Silent Weer The Dreon Of The Oopsi Age Of Loneliness Carly s Song Out From The Deep q The Crees Of Changes RUN The content within blue area will be captured on the current frame as a separate picture You can enter or modify identifier name to make it more self explanatory before saving the picture remember that identifier names should contain only Latin alphabet letters numbers and underscore character identifier Use the same technique for cutting any number of the pictures from the current captured screen by sequentially changing size and location of the blue screen capture area and by pressing the PrintScrn After you finish cutting you can go back to the main capture repository by pressing Shift PrintScrn The blue enclose frame will disappear and captured program will unfreeze also PrintScrn button will continue capturing the entire area 10 6 Editing captured frames Review all the captured screens Make sure that all the necessary screens are captured Repeat capturing if any screens are missing Sometimes if the Capture Cursor mode is On the very first Frame will be empty it means that capturing mouse movements took place prior to the first scree
339. s 2 6 Energia Buran CACourses 2 6 Energia Buran CACourses 2 6 Energia Buran CACourses 7 6 i CCourses 7 6_ CACourses 2 6 0 Buran orbiter CACourses 6 Back to Earth CACourses 2 6 CACourses 2 6 Use transitions on images display Duration Sec Display orginal image in separate window Click on the picture to view full size Click on the picture to close this pict On the Images tab you can specify the list of image description sound blocks and using transition effects Use button to open image properties dialog Create icon automatically lon file Image description As it could be amp nbsp Buran amp n Select image file and fill Description field You can also attach sound file to each image swf or mp3 wma wav It will be played when user selects this image Image Gallery 2 Use default color scheme Color scheme Icons height Block margin Border color Fill color mair Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Interblock spacing On the Icons block tab you can switch displaying of icons ribbon on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds
340. s in pixels or relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e border width in pixels e intertab spacing Accordion tab block Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Accordion tab block Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 8 Tab block timeline Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block Example of object appearance The Invasion of Russia The Treaty of Tilsit in 1807 resulted in the Anglo Russian War 1807 12 Emperor Alexander declared war on the United Kingdom afte
341. s this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax soundOn Returns 1 if object is sound is currently on O otherwise SOBJ_ID soundOn 5 3 10 15 Close Module Button Close Module Button object is a special object which enables correct closing of the learning Module LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Object parameters Close Module Button Use default button set Enabled button tooltip Clase module Display confirmation dialog before close Confirmation text Module window will be closed Are yo Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active Use any graphic editor to create following three pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture will replace the second one when button is pressed specify path to the image under OnClick button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Close Module
342. s is not limitation object can be used on any other template LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Section 35 ofthe National Electricity Law MEL requires the Australian Energy Market Commission EMC to amend the National Electricity Rules MER governing economic regulation of electricity transmission revenue and prices on or before 1 July 2006 or a later date thatis prescribed under a Regulation made under the MEL The MCE made a regulation under the National Electricity Law that extends the time to make Rules governing the regulation of electricity transmission revenue and prices to 1 January 2007 This extension to the deadline enabled the Commission ta consider the economic regulation of transmission services in broadly two streams revenue and pricing Object parameters Comments Tab Use default tab set EN eee Window background color HFFFFFF el Tab vertical offset pot Enabled tab tooltip Comments No comments message No comments Cancel In case the Use default comments tab is checked then you can select default tab color specify mouse over tooltip messages and message that appears when no comments to slide is present Note that window background color will be used for all comments except for those imported from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly specified in PowerPoint source If Use default comments tab mar
343. s its own closing mechanism it is capable of generating the closing Event While building Frame we can use closing event for initiating various actions Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text After text is refreshed Refreshed on Text Added After text is added on Close Right after the moment when user clicks on Popup Close Button or on the Object window if Hide window on mouse click is checked Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result CLOSE TAB Closes the object REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text Note that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text 5 3 5 2 Relief Popup Window Such objects as Pop up windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the Slide Basically text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the similar Balloon type of objects Therefore Pop up window can be activated by clicking on the link or button It does not close automatically it remains open Compared to Balloon type of object Pop up window type has it s own windows closing mechanism Note that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties Because Rich Text
344. s menu as many as needed In the opened sub dialog screen fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer In the simple case only single condition is used for example when entered answer must exactly match some word You can also set condition Contain In this case entered answer will be validated on whether or not it contains the yy ll character string specified by author For example if Contain point conditions is set either one of the following words will be considered as correct answers Pointing pointless and pinpoint Lastly you can set the Match Case condition to match case when validating the answer In this case for above mentioned example the word Pointing which starts from the capital letter will not be considered as correct answer Text Fill In Blank Question Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Scoring Feedback Display Number of attempts Time limit sec Allow skip question Skipped question is Allow recuring approaches Display completed question message Display continued question message Use Limitations tab to set the following restrictions 1 Number of attempts Number of Attempts field is always available for input there is no automatic attempts calculation rule There you can specify the number of answer attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology 2 Time limit for the answer Upon
345. s option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing Skip Question button The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped with opportunity to provide the answer later or counted as failed without a chance for another attempt Multiple Group Matching Button Texts Sound Question Limitations Sconng Feedback i Display _ Display corect answer Display feedback messages Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Of
346. s previous tab if applicable DISPLAY Selects tab that is selected in method parameter starting from 1 if applicable Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _1D below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax item Number of current opened tab starting from 1 SOBJ_ID item allVisited Returns 1 if all tabs have been visited 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D allVisited 5 3 1 10 Managed tab block Sequence Tab block objects are used for displaying group of similar descriptions in one tabbed block This type of Object its own Controls ribbon with Next Previous buttons The main feature of this Object is its ability to group elements Example of object appearance DJs np P Controversial radio DJ Howard Stem is to replace Piers Morgan on the judging panel of America s Got a Talent it has been announced Stern 57 who presents a daily radio show on Sirius XM will join Howie Mandel and Sharon Osbourne on the team m The star has vowed to give honest opimons and said it was likely that feelings are going to be hurt An orignal shock jock Stem has often been in trouble for off colow remarks and comic transgressions In 2004 he was dropped by media giant Clear Channel after it was fined for indecency Despite his sometimes offensive and often sexual language the DJ says he does not deliberately
347. sahs cece EA na eas oh a uetenna E ma Ae unioticie cle deste eae wae tated aca E 295 eS dh FAG CUMS EANA wa daauae ae taeda Maaideu eB aeaia dey uedat ones N Manduca Santana ante ae cn demda tates aaeentaa serenaeenaneds 384 SEEN A Lt ETEA E PCR ee RT TE CEES Pie E EATE EET Pe CREE ee REE RY er ee Cee EEE EEE T Pee ee Ce oe 417 foie tl Bo tat TOO 2d eR PRR E PT Te nee Cemne EO er cee rr E N ene ere na Ent er 438 7 OS atta tite cectch eee usta ac eich ayta aiices Genkics neuen eit anal Ge atest ahah ete eat ucla Ga ict Liat ki kt te cnet ack eed 449 BA DO PIM E EE EE E NOTAE San tant cat Seta adios aa E ES ame a boinc E ee tiestaees 474 5 3 16 Creating customized copies Of ODJCCTS ccccccsseseccccnsesscecccuseccccsueseccessuuseccsssuuseccssauaseceessuaeessssuseeeseaes 494 SA CURSOR an a ce situs eter treet cnrec mets tts E T cena es cate nee a eure apes enn ey ate tenet aac nena ees eee care neue a eevee eaten 498 IAL USNO CU ONS ariin ren rete restr err ern ree Teer ey enn l rer acme ere Cer Prn rater eC yn A E reer renner Terr re rete err cre 498 IAA CUSO S IVIOVEMENT TINIE vicszccacs died scencntassen daar tacuanaaasana day ai oaastansa dans ueoetnei Sawa cad scant EN 499 9 SCENARIOS eth otic acces ened eters E E E a eee site oleae E A ius enct tua deuavesceaentaes 501 DOA PrOGUCl COLGIO Goce ahah a OES 501 6 HANDLING OBJECTS visiiri a a a a aa 502 OO BIECT POSITION WITAIN A FRAME sariei eneses toad e a 502 GET ODJECE SCLC CUOM eria ite ar EE E NA
348. score will be verified If this score subset does not exist in this objective then its score will be treated as 0 Source parameter can be some task identifier not necessarily object ID you can assign it as you wish but with respect to usual limitation on special symbols It is used to differ scores from different task in objective s score heap In other words this parameter defines subset of this objective s score Note that objects that can add score to objectives automatically i e Question and Test objects always use their Object ID as Source therefore you can easily verify score from any of such objects using its Object ID as Source parameter and do not forget to define Objective parameter Condition Token Defines the rule of verification Value Description i Verified score is less than Score parameter 7 Verified score is greater than score parameter Verified score is exactly equal to Score parameter ia Verified score is less than or equal to Score parameter Verified score is greater than or equal to Score parameter lt gt Verified score is not equal to Score parameter Score Number or expression must have numeric value Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by IF SCORE action must be indented at one position from IF SCORE 8 2 11 IF SUCCESS STATUS IF SUCCESS STATUS action executes set of dependant actions depending on the Success Status of the specified objective You can use ELSE action to form
349. screen capture mode At screen capture mode Press PrintScrn to create a new frame with a contents of red border By combination Shift PrintScarn you can activate a partiall screen capture mode At this mode the application window will become frosen and by PrintScrn on current frame will be stored contents of blue border To leave partial scren capture mode press Shift PrintScrn again To leave screen capture mode cick the CourseLab icon at Windows tray Back Net gt nil 10 3 Capture Frames After switching to the capture mode editor minimizes into the icon on the windows taskbar a Internet Red rectangular enclose appears which limits the area or capturing Make sure that all desired information is well fitted inside of the screen capture area Tre amaes Of Lust Goterenm Fred Le u Cafes Wert Away Press PrintScrn the first frame is captured Go to the next step in target program and press PrintScrn one more time Using PrintScrn continue capturing all the changes that you apply to the target program until you complete recording based on the desired scenario IMPORTANT If you marked Capture Cursor check box before entering the capture mode all mouse s clicks and movements will be recorded automatically However remember that mouse click does not automatically capture the screen do not forget pressing PrintScrn where appropriate Upon capture scenario is completed double click CourseLab ic
350. se Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Object e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The
351. sed when working with Agent Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Things to consider when working with Actions e Actions Talk Walk left right cannot automatically return to the idle mode The Agent will continue talking and walking until ordered to terminate the Action e Actions such as Yawn Head nod in agreement Head shake in disagreement so called simple Actions marked with will always return
352. seful for example to repeat animation on slide etc Contents tab or button with popup window displays the list of all slides and enables transition to any slide in the Module if Object parameters gt UII Clues Help Tab Use default tab set Enabled tab Onttousel ver tab Disabled tab OnClick Tab Border color horizontal Default tab color Tab vertical offset Enabled tab tooltip Disabled tab tooltip In case the default tab is used you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color Help Tab Header text Area text Strict Navigation mode You can modify header of the Help tab and insert Help text into the Rich Text fields Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Help Tab Display Parameters Sound i Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or
353. select the object in the Frame Structure left click on the object s identifier To select all the objects within the group in the Frame Structure left click on the group s identifier 6 1 2 Border and fill colors Opacity When you insert any Object into a Frame it is placed into the rectangular placeholder Use Color tab on the Format screen to specify placeholder s background color Note that these parameters pertain only to the Object s placeholder rather than the Object itself If the Objects fit the entire rectangular placeholder for example pictures it is appropriate to specify the placeholder s background color only when the pictures contain transparent areas Exceptions AutoShapes Objects where changes to placeholder s background and border color apply to the AutoShapes directly Colors and Lines Fill E No fill Color Transparency Lines E No lines Weight 1 On the same Color tab move the Transparency Slider to modify the opacity of the Object s placeholder as well as the opacity of the Object itself 6 1 3 Resizing Objects Resizing objects using mouse 1 Select object 2 Position the cursor over one of the object s handles 3 Press left mouse button 4 Hold the mouse button down and then drag the cursor to the desired location in the Slide Dotted frame which is moving along with cursor indicates new size of the object s placeholder 5 Release the
354. sequent frames the starting point of the cursor movement will be the cursor s end point on the previous Frame In order to modify cursor s end point simply drag the cursor icon using mouse into the desired point within a Slide Select Previous Frame menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of the cursor with the cursor s end position on the previous Frame Select Next Frame menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of the cursor with the cursor s end position on the next Frame 5 4 2 Cursors Movement Time It is possible to specify cursor movement starting time and duration of the cursor s movement Select Format Cursor menu item from the cursor context menu Format dialog screen opens up Format General Picture Appear after seconds Click Picture Apply to Apply to Selected coursors Cancel The Display field contains information regarding duration of the cursor movement The Appear after field contains information regarding cursor movement starting time Within the same Frame it is possible to create complex multiple cursors movement paths by adding several cursors It is obvious that for each subsequent cursor the movement start time must be later than the movement end time of previous cur
355. ses Editing Text Using left mouse button double click on Text Box or use Edit text option from the context menu to open text editing window Text Editing Window will open up 35 BIA at B Z U A 4 2 5 2 Images CourseLab enables insertion of the graphics created by any graphic editor tool into the Slides of learning module Please note that CourseLab itself does not support graphic editing 5 2 1 Using Images To insert picture into Frame of the learning Module you can either choose Picture sub menu within Insert menu or use Insert Picture From File Icon on the toolbar Locate the picture you need to insert and press Open button Module New Slide Ctrl M Format Tools Window Help Duplicate Slide New Frame Ctrl Shift M A Text Box Hga Object 2 From File ke Cursor qr AutoShapes Timeline Actions Scenario Picture will be inserted into the Slide and file itself will be copied into the Images folder of learning Module In case file being copied already exists the User will be prompted to cancel file overwriting LIMITATION Since Learning Modules can be further used on Internet all file names of the pictures should be web safe in particular it is recommended to use letters and numbers of Latin alphabet only no spaces and no special characters 5 2 2 Valid Graphic File Formats Any internet friendly graphic file formats can be used
356. sible corners and colored transparent rectangular area Examples of Notifier appearance L J L _ After inserting object into the Frame open Properties dialog screen Depending on selected object appearance you can change various parameters Notifier Notifier For Corners you can select corners size and color Notifier Parameters Notitier appearance Blink notifier Blink timer Opacity level Background color Border style Border color Border width WARNING Notifier area cannot be transparent in Course Lab workarea but has real colors and shape For Transparent area you can select blinking timer background color border parameters and opacity of the object Be aware that there s no possibility to display transparency for this object in CourseLab Edit mode therefore only background and border can be viewed 5 3 7 5 Gradient Backing with rounded corners Gradient Backing with rounded corners is used for design purpose Example of object appearance Object parameters Border color 7 Cece Fill color ACCCCCC Gradient color HFFFFFF Comer radius 6 px Border width 1 pax Shadow strength Normal Select color scheme for the Object one of predefined or custom according to your design requirements Change border width and corner radius if needed 5 3 7 6 Image thumbnail with magnification feature Image thumbnail with magnification fea
357. sor For all cursors with the Display click setting turned on the duration of the click is 0 7 second This time period needs to be considered when defining display time for the Frame and when specifying setting Appear After for the next cursor in the frame 5 5 Scenarios Scenario presents itself as a template for building interactions between multiple objects Scenarios enable author of the course to define necessary parameters and get a filling for the slide right away Even though the same task can be accomplished by placing text pictures and by specifying interactions between them the usage of scenarios significantly soeeds up the process Sample of Scenario Product Catalog 5 5 1 Product Catalog To insert Scenario on the Frame open Scenario Library on the task pane select Scenario and doouble click on its icon To change parameters of the scenario open Frame structure section on the task pane Select Edit scenario item from the context menu on the scenario identifier Dialog window opens up where you can specify parameters for scenario For each product the following is defined e Name of the product e File containing the picture of the product e Formatted text describing the product Upon completion of all parameters there will be list of the product s names displayed on the Slide Once one of the product s name from the list is selected the card for corresponding product opens u
358. splayed when the code for the Module is loaded arrange the necessary pictures in Graphic Editor and change corresponding pictures using Edit Object context Menu option LIMITATION Title Slide introduction appears on the screen before the system loads all of the Course Player files necessary for Module and Objects functionality therefore only the limited number of the objects such as pictures text blocks auto shapes and special objects from Title folder which do not require Course Player can be employed Links banners animation effects and other events are not functioning on Title Slide Except for mentioned above WYSIWYG editing mode is used for editing Title Slide 4 3 2 Editing Master Slide To turn On Master Slide editing mode use View gt Master Slide sub menu or quick switching button in the Slide s Panel 04 CourseLab Test Moa it View Insert Format Te O Title Eee H Normal oof w Slides Alt i ja Timeline Alt 2 Master Alt 3 Alt 0 Task Pane If required change replace pictures on the Master Slide insert Logo specify Module s name and so on The appearance of the objects on the Master Slide can be modified with respect to overall design of the Module LIMITATION Since Master Slide is simply background for other Slides therefore links banners animation effects and events are disabled Besides that there is a limitation on using Objects you can only use pictures text bl
359. srren aran eee C Use Feedback tab to specify feedback options which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond correct or incorrect and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box If student has used off all the attempts for response or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed user will not be credited for this answer This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing You may permit or restrict the feedback messages You can modify the text of feedback messages which is in RichText format Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back You can modify display coordinates for this window the coordinates are given relative to the object s upper left corner Note that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback it enables to turn On Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor By default all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details Matching Pairs Question Use custom timer colors Border color Background color Countdown color Attention color Finish color On the Display Button and Texts tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages Mat
360. ss of the action from the user In order to change default Transition settings right click on the target Slide icon from the Slide Panel and select Advance option from the context menu New Slide Delete Slide Rename Identifier In the open window select Wait for Action or Immediate Please refer to the Actions section of this document for other methods of programming Slide transitions View Slide Actions Comments 4 3 4 Adding Slides Once the Module is created it already contains the Slide Add text pictures and complex objects according to the course scenaio To add a new slide select Insert gt New Slide or use context menu in Slides Pane Add as many slides as you need and place a learning content on them Insert Format Tools Module Wi New Slide Ctrl M Duplicate Slide New Erame Ctrl Shift M Text Box Picture ea H Object 5 New Slide K Cursor Del ete Slide Timeline Actions 3 F Rename Scenario Identifier Master F Advance View Slide Hli Actions Comments You can always adjust position of the Slide left click on the Slide thumbnail image that you would like move and drag this Slide to the desired location while holding down the left mouse button 4 3 5 Preview Module During editing you always can preview module to see how it will be showed by Web Browser To preview entire module select Module gt View Module or press
361. ssions in Actions Expressions can be used in action parameters to calculate parameter values CourseLab variables and object properties can be used as expression arguments along with numbers and strings When action is launched every expression in action parameters is evaluated and replaced with expression value Boolean expression is the type of expressions that has boolean true or false as a result of evaluation This type of expression is generally used in IF action to define condition statement Example of boolean expression is H varl var2 10 Note that if you define incorrect expression it may cause the error in module Please double check expression syntax to avoid problems Operators allowed for building expressions Operator Description Arithmetic String Addition of numbers or concatenation of strings Subtraction or negation numbers only Multiplication numbers only amp amp Division numbers only Boolean NOT unary Boolean negation if operand evaluates to true then the result evaluates to false and vice versa AND if both operands evaluate to true then the result evaluates to true otherwise false OR if either or both operands evaluate to true then the result evaluates to true otherwise false Comparison Not equal usually works fine but may depend on automatic data type conversion Equal usually works fine but may depend on automatic data type conversion Greater than Greater th
362. stand the Event Action mechanism let us review the following example Picture a street with a pedestrian crosswalk equipped with two traffic lights one for pedestrians and another one for vehicles At the red signal of the vehicle traffic light the traffic stops and starts again when red signal switches its color to green Respectively the pedestrians start crossing the crosswalk on the green signal and stop at red In the example described above in the Event of red signal of the traffic light for vehicles the Car type of Objects performed the Action Stop In the Event of green signal of the traffic light for vehicles the Car type of Objects performed the Action Start Pedestrians type of Objects performs similar Actions but using Events of its own traffic light The source for the Events in both cases is the two traffic lights 8 1 Events An Event is a signal originated either by the Object or during the course by the user Generally Events are generated when the state of an Object changes for example at the moment of Object appearance otherwise Events are generated externally for example by mouse click on the Object Events are classified by Event Source Slide Frame Object or Keyboard 8 1 1 Slide and Frame Events Event Action beforedisplay CALL atterdisplay CHECKHIT DELAY DISPLAY ELSE EXTERNAL URL FOR GOTO IF IF COMPLETION STATUS IF SCORE he af I Ea
363. startw starth Returns initial width of the object in pixels SosJ_ID starth Note that initial and current values are exactly the same until any position or size changing action is applied to the object 6 3 2 Specific Object Properties Specific Object Properties are parameters of object which can be used for actions and text substitutions Depending on the type of the object there could be different set of specific properties or none Read corresponding object s topic to find which properties are available 6 4 Binding sounds to Objects In the learning Module created by CourseLab you can bind audio files to any Object Use the Sound tab on the Format dialog screen select the audio file to be bound with the Object the file will be automatically copied into the Images folder of the current learning Module Colors and Lines Size Postion Display Sound Sound File C Courses 27_T5 3 images failure4 swf Do not start playback automatically By default the sound will start playing right after the Object appears on the frame This feature can be turned off by checking the Disallow autoplay check box In this case the audio file will be bound to the Object however for playing the sound the special Action SOUND should be used The following audio formats can be used Adobe Flash swf or any format supported by the Windows Media Player wav w
364. stom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on State Changed User sets checkmark on Radio Button Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled value Returns value of currently checked radio button SOBJ_ID value 5 3 15 6 Drop down Menu Drop down Menu enables user making single choice selections out of a multiple values Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user le
365. t Description text Rich Text field for full descrioption of the element Vertical scrolling will be added automatically and sound file which will be played on tab selection You can add sound file for each Tab Display this tab selected from the start makes current tab default tab If this checkbox is not checked at one of the tabs then None selected text will be displayed in description area at object display If checkbox is checked at more than one tab first checked tab becomes default others will be ignored Select one of the predefined color schemes or define custom colors for tab description blocks gradient angle for background and common display parameters corner arc sizes and spacings Other params include e tab width in percent e corner radius in pixels or relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e border width in pixels e intertab spacing Tab block leftside tabs Hements Background Sound Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Color scheme Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size Inner margin px On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels o
366. t night in comparison to humans and inferior in daylight citation needed Cats like dogs and many other animals have a tapetum lucidum which is a reflective layer behind the retina that sends light that passes through the retina back into the eye 1 White this improves the abdity to Be see in darkness it appears to reduce net visual r acuity thus detracting when light is abundant In very bright light the siit tke iris doses very narrowly over the eye reducing the amount of light on the sensitive retina and improving depth of field Big cats have pupils that contract to a round point The tapetum and other mechanisms give the cat a minimum light detection threshold up to seven times lower than that of humans Variation in color of cats eyes in flash photographs is largely due to the reflection of the flash by the tapetum gt The same Object in real Course looks different Guide Marks are not visible but arrow from Description Area points exactly to the one of the Guide Marks Testing indicates that a cat s vision is greater at night in comparison to humans and inferior in daylight citation needed Cats ike dogs and many other animals have a tapetum lucidum which is a reflective layer behind the retina that sends light that passes through the retina back into the eye 1 While this improves the ability to see in darkness it appears to reduce net visual acuity thus detracting when light is a
367. t Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Things to consider when working with Actions e Actions Talk Walk left right cannot automatically return to the idle mode The Agent will continue talking and walking until ordered to terminate the Action e Actions such as Yawn Head nod in agreement Head shake in disagreement so called simple Actions marked with will always return to the idle state upon com
368. t Triggered Upon on Check User sets checkmark on Uncheck User removes checkmark on State Changed User sets or removes checkmark This event is triggered right before events mentioned above Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field SET STATE Set checkbox state Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ ID disabled value Returns 1 if object is currently checked 0 otherwise SOBJ_ D value 5 3 15 5 Group of Radio Buttons Group of Radio Buttons enables user making single Yes No selection for one out of several values Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions IMPORTANT The value entered is recorded in associated variable when user leaves field only Example of Object appearance Variant 1 f Variant z Object parameters Radio Button Group Value list Description Checked Varant 1 Non Vanant 2 r Non Variable scope Curent slide Specify variable name which will be used for storing user input LIMITATION Variable names must
369. t http vww adobe com To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Module menu Runtime Settings Checks Flash movie cannot be played in edit mode only placeholder of the movie is visible Object parameters Flash movie TT Parameters Hash source File C Courses 2 4 sandbox 0000021 image Se oo Display mode Transparent layer Background color Custom parameters Parameter custom_1 start_msq Hella Specify Flash movie source There are three options 1 Local file file will be automatically copied into the Images folder of learning Module 2 URL full URL of Flash movie 3 Code this option allows you to insert code from YouTube and similar services Object will try to determine Flash movie URL from this code However use this option with great care because it is potentially erroneous Be aware that uR and Code options refer to external content therefore this Flash movie becomes the subject for Flash Player security settings cross domain security Select the playing mode Adobe Flash Player supports the following window modes for playing the movie Window Mode Always on top of all layers Flash movie plays in its own virtual window in the Frame above the core browser display window therefore no other obje
370. t menu Specify the required timeout for the frame 11 Import from PowerPoint CourseLab allows importing content of the Microsoft PowerPoint presentations into the Learning Module 11 1 Import from PowerPoint Wizard CourseLab allows importing content of the Microsoft PowerPoint presentations into the Learning Module Note that Microsoft PowerPoint must be installed on the same computer to provide correct presentation import To start import select Tools gt Import from PowerPoint menu option Tools Module Window Help Import from PowerPoint Screen Capture Recalc Display Times Add Moduleto Templates Compress Images Options Import screen wizard opens up Press Next to continue Import from PowerPoint Welcome to the Import from PowerPoint Wizard Witha help of this Wizard you can create new slides from slides of PowerPoint presentation To continue dick Next qeyasino Version 2 4 Specify the path to the MS PowerPoint presentation to be imported Import from PowerPoint Presentation file Provide location of PowerPoint presentation file PowerPoint Presentation File C Presentation 1 ppt Specify the Master Slide press Master button to select which will be the base for the imported presentation The pink area on the Wizard s screen represents the imported presentation Press the Position button to specify the position of the imported presentation on the Slide
371. t of statements It contains the list of items with built in display manipulation mechanisms IMPORTANT Since this object contains built in display mechanisms the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame Example of object appearance wf ltem text goes here w Item text goes here Object parameters Bullet List Parameters Display Effects Sound List tems Description tem text goes here Button Next top margin e pa Divider style Divider color Divider width px Display top and bottom divider lines Fill in the statements list You can select bullet type and other appearance parameters for each list item Set button top margin if you plan to use it and divider lines between list items Depending on selected display mode parameters list on Display tab will be different Default mode is On user click this mode include text link form and image buttons all controls that activated with mouse click Define button or link parameters Bullet List In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay in seconds Bullet List me Display first item from the start Third mode On external call means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object s
372. t on slides with no comments Cancel In case the Use default comments tab is checked then you can select default tab color change comments window size specify mouse over tooltip messages and message that appears when no comments to slide is present Note that window background color will be used for all comments except for those imported from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly specified in PowerPoint source If Use default comments tab marker is unchecked then you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color Checkmark Hide object on slides with no comments can be useful to attract learner attention If it is checked default state then object will appear only on slides where comments are present Slide Comments Display Sound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 We Click sound Standard 1 ki Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 10 29 Comments Tab Comments Tab object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide that defined by the author or imported from PowerPoint Object default parameters are optimized for Standard templates but thi
373. t to Recipient file select in the CourseLab application on the Host computer menu option Help gt License gt Detach H2R file creation wizard opens up Locate ID file select detach period in days maximum 9999 select location for creating H2R file and press Next button Transfer H2R host to recipient file to Recipient computer IMPORTANT From this moment license on Host computer stops Attaching license on Recipient computer Select in the CourseLab application on the Recipient computer menu option Help gt License gt Attach Locate H2R file and press Next button From this moment license on Recipient computer starts to work 12 2 3 Return of the detached license If the detached license that is used on another computer becomes unusable before its expiration date then you can initiate early return of detached license back to Host computer Terms Recipient computer is the computer to which the detached license is or will be attached Host computer is the computer where CourseLab was installed and activated initially IMPORTANT License can be temporarily detached only on the Host computer There s no possibility to detach license from Recipient computer and attach it to some third computer i e cascade detach If you need to attach license to some third computer return it to Host first and then start usual detach procedure for another computer Creating R2H file on Recipient computer To create R2H Reci
374. tatements which will be displayed simultaneously Example of object appearance v Firstltem text v Second Item text v Third Item text Object parameters Standard Block List Parameters Border color tem mark tems text tem text First tem text Second tem test Third item text Inner margin pixels Select border color for the list items with respect to the overall design Select items mark for the list Item Input text for the list items Specify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block 5 3 12 5 Standard List Item Standard List Item object is used for creating Lists which contain clearly highlighted statements Example of object appearance v Firstitem text Object parameters Standard List Item Parameters Border color tem mark tem text fFistkemtet o Inner margin pickels Cancel Apply Select border color of item with respect to the overall design Select marker type for the list Item Input text for the list item Specify value for text margin Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block 5 3 12 6 Simple List Item Simple List Item object is used for creating Lists which contain clearly highlighted statements Example of object appearance VW First item text Object parameters Simple List Item N Parameters Background color DIF2FF Border color HBVESFF tem mark lte
375. tch the provided question items on one to many basis LIMITATION No more than one Test on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance IMPORTANT Matching pairs type of question is space consuming when placed into the Frame therefore we do not recommend setting the width of the object to less than 700 pixels Credied question Distribute animals into corresponding groups Drag elements io connect groug Atiempis 1 Object parameters Matching Groups Question Display question block Question text Display slots on group base Number of displayed slots Max number of matches Custom number of slots 4 Match weight is used only if comesponding scoring type is selected To input question s text press TE button of the corresponding field The format of input area is RichText therefore all font settings size color and style will be saved as you type the text in Specify variants of groups and corresponding matching items In the list of variants add as many groups as needed using menu button Group base Matches Matches Cat Dog Porcupine Rat Whale Cancel Please remember that there are size limitations therefore try using short texts and small fonts If suitable you can define weight of each base match pair to use it in complex scoring types Unlike the group items which will be displayed in order they were inserted the matches w
376. ted audio file which playback needs to be either started or stopped File String Path to the audio file which playback needs to be either started or stopped In case File parameter is not empty input value for this field will have higher priority than value of the Object parameter thus action will be performed against the file specified in the File parameter instead of the Object the value of the Object parameter will be ignored and may be left blank Action Token Defines whether playback should be started or stopped Value Description Start Selected audio source will start playing Stop Selected audio source will stop playing Remarks Audio file can be in Adobe Flash Player swf format or in any other format supported by Windows Media Player mp3 wav wma and others 8 2 14 ELSE In case alternatives should be used when IF conditional expression or other conditional action is not satisfied value is false ELSE action can be added as a dependant action to the IF action to define alternative sequence of actions ELSE Parameters No parameters Remarks ELSE must be indented at one position from its parent conditional action Action sequence which is to be managed by ELSE action must be indented at one position from ELSE 8 2 15 METHOD METHOD action enables launching execution of methods actions built into the Object However it should be taken into consideration that not all types of objects hav
377. ten or darken colors of selected color schemes Change Tab font settings Display controls ribbon Tithe t t Color scheme Custom color Fill brightness Title font Custom fort Font style _ Ay On the Controls tab you can change display parameters for Controls ribbon and buttons or switch it off Custom color Fill brightness Border width Margin top bottom Margin left right Use custom fill color Fill color HFFFFFF m C a On Descriptions tab you can change display parameters for Description Area Display background ACCCCOE HEEEEEFE HFFFFFF Lightest 2 Px 0 deg 10 px Inner margin 17 px Shadow enh On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius e inner margin Managed tab block Process Use sound effects Mouseover and click Standard 1 Standard 1 On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable g
378. ter Skip Question button is pressed on Question End After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left on timeout or on attempts limit Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oBJ_ID below means current object ID Property questionMode questionType questionDuration questionTimer itemQuantity questionValue attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns Returns current question mode tokens normal review choice Returns allowed question duration in seconds if defined Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined Returns total variants quantity Returns current question value spot values divided by for example 0 1 0 0 O corresponds to empty spot 1 to checked spot Note that the order of spots is always as it was defined in object no matter shuffled or not Returns current number of attempts left Returns allowed number of attempts 5 3 4 3 Multiple select Syntax SOBJ_ID questionMode SOBJ_ID questionType SOBJ_ D questionDuration SOBJ_ID questionTimer SOBJ_ D itemQuantity SOBJ_ID questionValue SOBJ_ ID attemptsLast SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal Multiple Select Question object enables user to choose one or several correct items from a list of possible answers LIMITATION No more than one Test on the Slide is recommended Example of object app
379. ter can contain CourseLab variable value as var_name where var_name is variable name please refer to VARIABLE section for additional information or object s property value as SOBJ ID property where OBJ_ID is actual object ID and property is existing object s property name please refer to Object Properties section for additional information or expression 8 2 26 CHECKHIT CHECKHIT action is used for verifying the particular object that was dropped onto the selected ones The only parameter for this action is the identifier of the object being dragged which is to be verified with regards to compliance Typically this action is triggered by ondrop event generated by object target In case identifier of the object being dragged is identical to the specified one sequence of dependant actions will be executed CHECKHIT objectid Object Parameters Object String The identifier of the object being dragged which is to be verified with regards to compliance Remarks You can use ELSEaction to form alternative action sequence i e when condition is not met Action sequence which is to be managed by CHECKHIT action must be indented at one position from CHECKHIT 8 2 27 SIZE START SIZE START action initiates resizing of the object within a frame LIMITATION Some objects usually those that automatically adjust their size depending on content for example text boxes balloons etc may resize correctly by X coord
380. the overall design of the Slide Press Apply button to observe changes Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text If necessary specify value for inner margin Inner margin defines the space between balloon border and the text After you done with parameters settings place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area Usually Balloon should open up when the user s mouse moves over that link or active area Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define onMouseOver and onMouseOut actions enabling display of Balloon 5 3 6 2 Standard Balloon Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide In general amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small smaller than the instructions used for the similar Pop up window types of objects Balloon object is intended to open up when the user s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user s mouse moves away from the active area Therefore Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism Compared to Pop up window type of object Balloon objects can have pointer arrow some explanation on TRIGGER TEAT This is the TRIGGER TEAT for balloon Object parameters Standard Balloon Parameters Background Border color yellow orange Arrow Balloon text Balloon inner mar
381. til the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ID curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names OBJ ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited OBJ_ID queue 5 3 11 5 Agent different psychotypes An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s
382. tion enables launching of dependant actions concurrently i e each next action will be launched virtually simultaneously with previous one using parallel thread PARALLEL Parameters No parameters Remarks Action sequence which is to be managed by PARALLEL action must be indented at one position from PARALLEL See also SEQUENTIALLY action to launch action in sequence this is default behavior 8 2 18 SET SCORE SET SCORE action changes score for specified objective SET SCORE objectiveid Objective edit Source select Additive edit Score Parameters Objective String The identifier of the objective the score of which will be changed Source String or string expression Specifies the source of the current score modification i e some task identifier not necessarily object ID you can assign it as you wish but with respect to usual limitation on special symbols It is used to differ scores from different task in objective s score heap In other words this parameter defines subset of this objective s score Additive Token Defines the rule of changing Value Description Replace Score will replace already existing in the given objective score from specified source Add Score will be added to already existing in the given objective score from specified source Score Number or expression must have numeric value 8 2 19 DELAY DELAY action that is inserted into the sequence of actions will interrupt actions e
383. tioned methods can be also employed for moving multiple objects Allocation of selected objects in relationship to each other will remain unchanged Precise positioning of the object 1 Select desired object 2 Open Format dialog window by specifying Format Object command which is available either by selecting Format menu item from the context menu or by pressing button in the toolbar 3 Transfer to the Position page on the dialog window 4 Specify new object s Horizontal and Vertical coordinates Format Colors and Lines Size Position Display Sound Position on slide Horizontal 196 Vertical 184 al Can be dragged by mouse Cancel You can also use Format window for resizing multiple selected objects simultaneously When Format dialog window is opened the Width and the Height fields will be populated with the sizing values only if these values are identical for all selected objects If you leave the field empty corresponding size will remain unchanged for each object Format Object command is also available from the object s context menu in the Frame Structure section of the Tasks Panel You can cause the Object to be dragged by the mouse when the checkbox Can be dragged by mouse is on the same tab in this case learner can drag the specified Object within a frame 6 1 5 Aligning Objects The objects on the Slide can be aligned relative to each other For two or more selected ob
384. tions scoring Feedback Display Scoring type Weight of question attempt Crediting method fixed oO regressive Question objectives d HE Objective total Display question maximum score pane Weight of 1 attempt for regressive method Use Score tab to specify scoring parameters for the question The essential CheckBox is Credit Question In case it is not marked all other scoring parameters are disabled therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user Such questions are referred as not credited questions These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic to keep the user focused and SO forth In case of the credited question the following options are available Scoring type O Question weight in case of correct answer question weight will be placed in all question objectives Weight by objective in case of correct answer different weight will be placed to each objective according to weight in objective list Base weight of a question attempt base number of points for the question or attempt for regression method This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question If fixed crediting method is used the base weight of question equals the total score The following crediting methods can be used O Fixed Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts This score is equal t
385. tive will change Using Rules allows transferring control on both Success and Completion Statuses to the CourseLab player i e statuses will be changed automatically To add Rule 1 Select Module gt Runtime Settings ib Test Module Module Window Help J amp J View Module F5 t Tools View Slide Shift F5 Update Objects Delete Unused Files Design Settings Alt F 2 In the opened Runtime Settings dialog screen go to the Rules page 3 On the Rules tab press Add button Module Properties total Success Unknown Success Incomplete total Success Unknown Success Completed For each Rule specify the following Objective Success Status Unknown Completion Status completed s Conditions Slides Visited From SLIDE_1 To SLIDE _6 AND Slides Visited From SLIDE _8 To SLIDE 8 Cancel e Identifier of the objective which state will be changed due to the Rule execution e Success Status for specified objective in case Rule must change it e Completion Status for specified objective in case Rule must change it e The logical expression among the conditions If conditions are satisfied Rule will work The different logical conditions are connected to each other by following logical operators AND OR XOR and NOT To change logical operation select desired operation fr
386. tly maximum value of each axis is treated as 100 scale is applied to corresponding axis only e Use custom value for 100 custom value for each axis is treated as 100 scale is applied to corresponding axis only Radar Chart Data series Axes Display legend Display series descriptions Color scheme Border width aradient angle Comer arc size 0 1 Display description on mouse click Use transition on descriptions Cancel On the Description and legend tab you can switch displaying of description blocks on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin e event to start display mouse click or mouse over e display pointer line to element enables display of connecting line between sector and description block e use transitions on description enables using transitions on displaying description block LIMITATION Transitions work only in Internet Explorer Radar Chart Color scheme Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width aradient angle Comer arc size 0 1 Inner margin On the Background tab you c
387. to the idle state upon completion Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s commands queue and new Action is postponed until the previous one finishes execution The Command queue of the Agent role is based on the FIFO First In First Out data handling concept i e each new incoming Action command is added to the end of the execution line Therefore by employing the Command queue you can create any sequence of Actions for the character Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names SOBJ_ D curState
388. tom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 1 2 Image Gallery 2 with icons ribbon Image Gallery 2 with icons ribbon is used for displaying multiple images in one block on click on icons in the icon ribbon In case width or height of the image is more than object s image block images will be automatically resized to fit the block Images that are less than image block will be displayed as is no scaling If allowed user also can click the image to open Original size picture in separate window Example of object appearance There are 4 configurable zones in the Object e Background blue on the picture e Images block white area with gradient where images are displayed e Caption text block below the image block with text description for each image e Icons block IMPORTANT Please take in account that each image will consume time to download and computer resources to handle Though there are no technical restrictions on quantity of images in the object you should consider possible learners computer and network restrictions Object parameters Image Gallery 2 p Background Images Icons block Images list CACourses 27 6 Buran amp nbspis CACourses 6 Transportung E CCourses 2 6 Transportung E CANCourses 2 6 2 Setting upanbsp CCourse
389. ts Display item sound Standard 1 Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Item Displayed At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISPLAY NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax lastltem Returns number of last displayed item starting from 1 SOBJ_ID lastltem nextitem Returns number of next displayed item if exists SOBJ_ ID nextltem totalltems Returns total number of items SOBJ_ D totalltems 5 3 12 4 Standard Block List Standard Block List object is used for creating lists of semantically related block s
390. ts from O to 1 0 corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin Pie Chart Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing 5 3 2 2 Pyramid chart Pyramid chart is representing hierarchical data Each level can contain more than one block It is Similar to Rings chart represents the same type of hierarchy Example of object appearance Object parameters Pyramid Chart Define the list of pyramid levels and level elements blocks on the Elements tab For each level you can assign color scheme for each block in level text of element description text and its parameters Please note that if there are no blocks defined in level then it will not displayed at all Top level can have only one block if more than one block is defined then only first will be displayed WARNING If no elements defined on current level level will be displayed as empty level Top level can contain one element only if more than one is defined only first will be displayed Use button to open level properties dialog m Normal MouseOver Selected Level color scheme Red
391. ts with regards to the user s actions and interpretation of the actions by the object When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Ready When Flash movie is fully loaded and ready to accept commands on Action End When any action is ended Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax curState Current state action one of action token short names S OBJ ID curState lastState Last state action one of action token short names OBJ_ID lastState queue Action queue action tokens comma delimited SOBJ_ D queue 5 3 11 8 Animals An Agent is an animated character with a set of basic Actions which can be launched using this Object s Methods IMPORTANT This object is created using Adobe Flash technology so make sure to turn on this feature which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module Example of Object Object parameters You can specify an Agent s appearance and display parameters similar to Flash movie display settings in fact an Agent is a
392. ture is used to display magnified image on user click Picture will be sized to maximal size that is allowed by Course Template Example of object appearance in Thumbnail mode Example of object appearance in Magnified mode Object parameters Button color Fill color Shadow strength Magnify button tooltip Click here to magnify the image Close button tooltip Click here to close magnified image Close on mouse click anywhere on image Select image file Define color schemes for button and background Change tooltips if needed 5 3 7 7 Button for Next Previous Button can be used to launch Actions It has predefined symbols for Next Previous Example of object appearance b Object parameters Select color schemes for Button 5 3 8 Title Slide Title Slide group of objects is used strictly on the Title Slide 5 3 8 1 Start Module Button Start Module button appears in inactive state on the Splash Screen Slide while the main block of Module is loading and becomes active only when Module is fully loaded Example of object appearance STARTMODULE gt Object parameters Start Module Button By default the standard Start Module button is used If you wish to use different button then create 2 images using any graphical editor e First picture will be displayed while the main block of Modul
393. ucture will be displayed Note that it is open exactly on the section which contains selected Object You may create new Object s copy in the same section or in any other section or even create your own section right click on the sections panel EE Objects Agents Yes m Nic Balloons True F alse Ordering DataVisualisation Design External Form Lists Media Navigation Popups Rapid Development Tests Textboxes Title Slide 6 Right click on right panel of Dialog window and select Create Object option ME Objects Agents gt Yes m Ne Balloons True F alse Ordering Data Visualisation Design External Form Lists Media Navigation Popups Rapid Development Tests Textboxes Title Slide 7 Specify identifier for new Object copy It must be unique and consist of latin characters and numbers no spaces and special characters New Object 8 Click OK new Object s copy is created It still has empty green icon ME Objects Agents gt Yes m Nic True F alee Balloons Data Visualisation Design E E External Matching Pairs One to many Many to many Form Lists Media Navigation Popups Rapid Development Tests Textboxes Title Slide 9 Create desired graphic file for icon GIF or PNG 64x48 pixels in your favourite graphic editor Double click on the empty green icon to open Object editor window Select Picture tab Right click on th
394. under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button e The fourth picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Replay Slide Button Parameters Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled
395. uration questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds if defined SOBJ_ID questionTimer itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity SOBJ_ D itemQuantity attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts left SOBJ_ D attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts SOBJ_ D attemptsTotal 5 3 4 9 Multiple matching groups many to many Multiple Matching Groups Question require from the user to match the provided question items on many to many basis LIMITATION No more than one question on the Slide is recommended Example of object appearance IMPORTANT This type of question is space consuming when placed into the Frame therefore we do not recommend setting the width of the object to less than 700 pixels Credited queston Which types of engines are used on these transportation units Combustion Steam asl a2 Gas turbines SUBMIT ANSWER Object parameters Connect matches bo correct groups i Car 2 Tank 3 Locomotive 4 Airplane 5 Submarine Multiple Group Matching Texts Scoring Display question block Question text Group text Combustion Steam Gas turbines Hectic Match Car Tank Locomotive Airplane Display slots on group base Number of displayed slots Max number of matches ka Custom number of slots Match weight is used only if comesponding scoring hype is selected
396. ures become active Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures e The first picture displays the button in enabled state specify path to the image under Enabled Button e The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button specify path to the image under OnMouseOver Button e The third picture displays the disabled button specify path to the image under Disabled Button e The fourth picture displays the button being pressed specify path to the image under OnClick Button You can specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Previous Slide Button Parameters Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button
397. used to control the Agent See detailed description of object control in Agent document Object methods The following Methods can be used when working with Agent Character e ACTION forces the Agent to execute some of the Actions defined in the Object It has 2 parameters Action itself which needs to be executed and an option for returning back to the idle state the Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command e IDLE takes Agent back to the idle mode e TELEPORT relocates Agent into a location specified by coordinates using effects Let us review the ACTION Method in greater details Almost all Actions embedded into the Object have two execution phases Action execution and return to idle state When you select automatic return into the idle mode the above mentioned Action phases will be automatically executed one after another When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode only the first phase execution of the Action itself is launched The return to idle state is postponed until you use the IDLE Method or launch any other Action in that case before the new Action can be executed the Object returns to the idle state automatically Sequence of Actions If the agent receives a command for a new Action while it is not in the idle mode meaning it is in the process of completion of a previous Action this command is stored in the agent s
398. ve Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance Second Shide Explanation 2 3 Second Slide Object parameters Simple Progress Bar Use default rectangular icons Icon size hor pa vert Background color i e z Border color g 7 o Border width pa Enable jump to slide on icon click Current slide icon Icon spacing px Background color L Background color E Border color r Border width px Border width px Border color a Unvisited slide icon Background color g Inner margin por Border color g Border width px Cancel Apply By default the standard Slide s icons are used If you wish to use different icons uncheck the marker Fields for inserting pictures become available Create 3 images using any graphical editor e The first image will be displayed indicating already visited Slide e The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide e The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed Otherwise you can modify appearance parameters of the default Slide s icons Simple Progress Bar Display curent slide name Display slide names on MouseOver Fant Ai Font Arial 17 Font size pa Font weight Normal Font style Normal font col m Text spacing 1 pox Strict slide order message Y
399. vent will follow This Event is useful for actions which invokes already created Objects since you can be sure that Objects are already exist 8 1 2 Events common to all Objects B Event Action ondblclick CHECKHIT onlmousedown DELAY onimouseup DISPLAY onmousedown ELSE onmouseup EXTERNAL URL onmouseover FOR onmouseout GOTO ondrop IF beforedisplay IF COMPLETION STATUS atterdisplay IF SCORE IF SUCCESS STATUS JAVASCRIPT a Ir H Cen Any Object located on the Frame can be the source for the following events e the beforedisplay Event is generated right before start of creation of the selected Object e the afterdisplay Event is generated at the moment of finishing Object creation at the end of an effect execution if the transition effect has been used at display e the onclick Event is generated by the user by left mouse click directly within an Object e the ondblclick Event is generated by a mouse double click directly within an Object The pause between the clicks which indicates whether this is double click rather than two single clicks corresponds to the mouse properties defined under the operating system settings on the user s computer e the onlmousedown Event is generated when the left mouse button is pressed down within an Object e the onlmouseup Event is generated when the pressed left mouse button is released within an Object e the onrmouse
400. ware Due to this fact and due to delays in Flash JavaScript communication some delay up to 1 sec may occur a between calling the object s method and method s execution b between changing Flash Video playing state and corresponding object s event c in changing property values Please be aware of this fact Property Returns mute Returns 1 if mute sound is set to true O otherwise volume Returns current sound volume range 0 100 duration Returns full media duration in seconds currentPosition Returns current position in media in seconds Syntax SOBJ_ID mute SOBJ_ID volume SOBJ_ D duration SOBJ_ ID currentPosition currentState Returns current object state tokens 0 means stopped 1 means playing SOBJ_ ID currentState 5 3 10 Navigation Navigation Objects enable transition among Slides and Frames The majority of Navigation objects have certain usage limitations therefore be cautious when implementing 5 3 10 1 Universal Button Universal button is configurable Button Template that allows to use it to display selected Objects Example of object appearance Object parameters Universal Button Enabled button MouseOver button Disabled button Enabled button tooltip Disabled button tooltip Treat as navigation object Strict Navigation mode Use Open Close methods of target object Target object This Object has no predefined images Use any graphic editor to create following 3 pictures
401. where within a pop up window Note you can omit selecting closing rule but in this case it will be your responsibility to define closing procedure Depending on the purpose of inserted pop up window it might be necessary to disable display of pop up right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of pop up window If necessary select display effect for the object This object can utilize additional efects zoom in and fly in This object can be displayed as modal i e it will be displayed as only active object all other objects will be dimmed Relief Popup Window Use sound effects Click sound Standard 1 w Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch item display sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Events Since object has its own closing mechanism it is capable of generating the closing Event While building Frame we can use closing event for initiating various actions Events are available using CourseLab built in events manipulation mechanism Event Triggered Upon on Text After text is refreshed Refreshed on Text Added After text is added on Close Right after the moment when user clicks on Popup Close Button or on the Object window if Hide window on mouse click is checked Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods
402. will use alternative path automatically LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE LIMITATION If there will be more than one object of such type in the Module then only one of them will be used Note that this object is virtual hidden therefore you can see such placeholder in editor Object parameters Add object to the Master Slide Open object s properties Pressing add as manu chapters as you need Alternative Path cept sid e Set chapter number and name e Select chapter s title slide optional e Create chapter s slide list Note that the slides will be displayed exactly in the order in this list e Select chapter s objective it s completion status will be changed to completed when all completion conditions will met e Change the message that will be displayed if the learner will try leave incomplete chapter e Set completion conditions Operator Condition type Objective score Objective completi Objective success All chapter slides Slide list Cancel Object methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result EXCLUDE CHAPTER Selected chapter is excluded from alternative path 5 3 10 26 Frame Navigator Frame Navigator is a special object which indicates amount of the visited Frames in particular Slide relative to the overall amount of the Frames in the Slide Example of
403. xecution for specified time DELAY edit Duration select Infinite Parameters Duration Number Defines delay time in seconds for interrupting the sequence of actions If parameter Infinite is set to Yes then Duration parameter will be ignored Infinite Token Defines delay mode Value Description Yes The sequence of actions will be interrupted indefinitely until some action from the user is performed Duration parameter will be ignored No The sequence of actions will be interrupted for the time specified 8 2 20 VARIABLE VARIABLE action defines runtime variable and it s value or in case variable with specified name already exists variable s value will be changed VARIABLE edit Name edit Value select Scope Parameters Name String Name of the variable Value Boolean number string or expression Value of variable Scope Token Defines scope where this variable is variable Possible values Value Description Current Slide Variable will exist only on current Slide Entire Module Variable will be accessible for all the Slides within a Module Using variables in expressions To insert variable value into expression use prefix symbol in front of the variable name i e if variable name is var_name then var_name should be used for inserting variable value into the expression See Using Expressions in Actions for more details Remarks To modify existing variable s value use the same VARIABLE acti
404. you can select color change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs change object s border size and color Calculator Tab Header text Description Strict Navigation mode You can modify header of the Calculator tab and insert short description text into the Rich Text fields Strict Navigation Mode automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back Calculator Tab Display Parameters sound Use sound effects Events with sound Mouseover and click Mouseover sound Standard 1 Click sound Standard 1 Wt Cancel On the Sound tab you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS _s Restrict access to Tab ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Tab OPEN TAB Opens Tab if access is not disabled CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific pr
405. you can switch click and mouseover sounds on and off or change it to custom sounds IMPORTANT Sounds must be short and have no starting lag Otherwise it may lead to undesirable delays in course playing Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties this object has some specific properties that can be used in actions and in text substitutions oB _ID below means current object ID Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled O otherwise SOBJ_ D disabled 5 3 10 11 Previous Slide Button Previous Slide Button Object is a special object which enables transition to the previous Slide from the current Slide In case there exists Alternative path in the Module object will use alternative Module structure from Alternative path LIMITATION This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER SLIDE Example of object appearance d PREV Object parameters Previous Slide Button Use default button set Disabled button tooltip Access is not allowed Enabled button tooltip Next Slide Strict Navigation mode Cancel By default standard button set is used In case you prefer to use different button remove the check mark Use default button set Fields for specifying path to the pict
406. ze 0 1 Description inner margin Display description on mouse click Display pointer line to element Use transitions on description Transition Duration On the Description tab you can switch displaying of description blocks on and off and define its display parameters e color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative units from O to 1 O corresponds to no arc 1 corresponds to half of width or height shorter one e inner margin e event to start display mouse click or mouse over e display pointer line to element enables display of connecting line between sector and description block e use transitions on description enables using transitions on displaying description block Pie Chart Color scheme yt Border color Fill color main Fill color gradient Border width Gradient angle Comer arc size 0 1 Description inner margin Desay desorption on Display pointer line to element Use transitions on description Duration os On the Background tab you can switch displaying of background on and off and define its display parameters color scheme one of predefined or custom e border width in pixels e fill gradient angle from 0 north direction to 360 degrees counterclockwise e corner radius in pixels or in relative uni

8.2 Actions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents